PATENT ABSTRACT
A virtual assistant may communicate with a user in a conversational manner based on context. For instances, a virtual assistant may be presented to a user to enable a conversation between the virtual assistant and the user. A response to user input that is received during the conversation may be determined based on contextual values related to the conversation or system that implements the virtual assistant.

PATENT DESCRIPTION
BACKGROUND 
       [0001]    Creating and maintaining knowledge bases that are used for various projects can be a time consuming task. In the past, a great deal of human effort has been required to create and maintain knowledge bases in terms of developing, debugging and maintaining such knowledge bases. Errors that present themselves in a knowledge base can often cascade or grow when such knowledge bases are deployed and used by various applications. Thus, an important consideration in knowledge base development concerns accurately developing and deploying the knowledge base. 
       SUMMARY 
       [0002]    This Summary is provided to introduce a selection of concepts in a simplified form that are further described below in the Detailed Description. This Summary is not intended to identify key features or essential features of the claimed subject matter, nor is it intended to be used to limit the scope of the claimed subject matter. 
         [0003]    Various embodiments provide a tool, referred to herein as “Active Lab” that can be used to develop, debug, and maintain knowledge bases. These knowledge bases (KBs) can then engage various applications, technology, and communications protocols for the purpose of task automation, real time alerting, system integration, knowledge acquisition, and various forms of peer influence. 
         [0004]    In at least some embodiments, a KB is used as a virtual assistant that any real person can interact with using their own natural language. The KB can then respond and react however the user wants: answering questions, activating applications, or responding to actions on a web page. 
     
    
     
       BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS 
         [0005]    The same numbers are used throughout the drawings to reference like features. 
           [0006]      FIG. 1  illustrates a situation group in accordance with one or more embodiments. 
           [0007]      FIG. 2  illustrates a concept group in accordance with one or more embodiments. 
           [0008]      FIG. 3  illustrates a vocab group in accordance with one or more embodiments. 
           [0009]      FIGS. 4-135  illustrate user interfaces in accordance with one or more embodiments. 
           [0010]      FIG. 136  illustrates an example system in accordance with one or more embodiments. 
       
    
    
     DETAILED DESCRIPTION 
     Overview 
       [0011]    Various embodiments provide a tool, referred to herein as “Active Lab” that can be used to develop, debug, and maintain knowledge bases. These knowledge bases (KBs) can then engage various applications, technology, and communications protocols for the purpose of task automation, real time alerting, system integration, knowledge acquisition, and various forms of peer influence. 
         [0012]    In at least some embodiments, a KB is used as a virtual assistant that any real person can interact with using their own natural language. The KB can then respond and react however the user wants: answering questions, activating applications, or responding to actions on a web page. 
         [0013]    In the discussion that follows, various terminology will be used. The following glossary is provided to assist the reader in the discussion that follows: 
         [0014]    Agent: Agents are entities programmed to respond to inputs in a pre-determined fashion. They are often used to mimic a human consciousness. 
         [0015]    AppCalls: AppCalls are Unit responses that perform application operations instead of simply generating a text response. 
         [0016]    Building Blocks: Building Blocks are sets of vocabulary or Concepts, often used to group together terms and Concepts that can be associated with one another, but are not always synonymous. 
         [0017]    Cascade: Cascades are graphical representations of the load order and match type of vocabulary, Concepts, and Units within the database. 
         [0018]    Concepts: Concepts serve as the bricks of Units. As such, they are composed of Vocab Terms, Helper Terms, and Wild Cards arranged in specific input patterns that trigger the Concept&#39;s activation. 
         [0019]    Context IQ Engine, the: The Context IQ Engine is essentially the algorithm that tracks and processes user inputs. 
         [0020]    Data Mining: Data-mining is the targeted recursion of a set of FPML. After the results for a particular input have been achieved, the remainder of the input is run through a specific cascade, which is a self-sufficient FPML set in its own right. 
         [0021]    Dependencies: Dependencies for a Concept or Vocab Term are all those objects which depend upon the aforementioned term or Concept for operation. 
         [0022]    Dockable Window: Dockable windows are objects made visible by means of the View menu. These windows can be dragged and dropped at any location on the screen, and may be docked either on the right-hand side of the screen, or the top. When docked, multiple windows can be accessed via tabs. 
         [0023]    FPML: A programming language, FPML, short for Functional Presence Mark-up Language is used to govern the behavior of Active Lab projects. 
         [0024]    Helper Terms: Helper Terms are words or phrases that are commonly used, but have only one meaning. As such, they are not of sufficient importance to devote separate Vocab Terms and Concepts to them. Helper Terms may be used in both Concepts and Units. 
         [0025]    Input Files: Input Files are *.txt files that contain words and/or phrases. They are used in Record Lists and Concepts. 
         [0026]    Input Patterns: Input patterns determine the triggering of Concepts and Units. In Concepts, input patterns are composed of Vocab Terms, Wild Cards, and Helper Terms. In Units, input patterns are in turn composed of Concepts and Helper Terms. In both Concepts and Units, input patterns may be configured to trigger only if the input is in a specific order, or by proximity. All Concepts and Units must have at least one input pattern, and many have more than one. 
         [0027]    Projects: Projects are the knowledge base storage configuration within the lab. 
         [0028]    Situations: Situations are groups of related Units. For instance, a group of Units that all deal with the personality of a project may be grouped together under a personality situation. 
         [0029]    Synonyms: Synonyms are words that share the same definition with one another and may be used interchangeably. Linguist&#39;s note: This is not entirely true. Many words may have the same definition, but carry different connotations. While they could technically be substituted, doing so would alter the reader&#39;s understanding of the sentence. 
         [0030]    Test Questions: Test questions are sample inputs that are intended to trigger Units and Concepts. They are generally archetypal in nature, and are used as a guide for input patterns. 
         [0031]    Units: Units are composed of Concepts and Helper Terms arranged in input patterns. When those input patterns are triggered, the Unit activates a response, in the form of text or an AppCall. 
         [0032]    Units, Nested: Like Units, except that their response is contingent upon another Unit. A nested Unit may only be triggered immediately after its parent Unit has been triggered. This allows for continuity in conversation with the project. 
         [0033]    User: The user is the individual human being who operates the software. 
         [0034]    Vocab: Short for “Vocabulary,” Vocab Terms form the basis of Concepts, and consist themselves of synonyms. 
         [0035]    Wild Cards: Wild Cards function as placeholders within Concepts for any random word or words. 
         [0036]    In the discussion that follows, a section entitled 
       Principles of Active Lab 
       [0037]    Knowledge bases (KB) cover the entire scope of a project, including all the information that ActiveAgent uses, along with all of its capabilities. The files themselves are written in a programming language known as FPML (Functional Presence Markup Language), a language similar to XML. This includes master FPML files, optional FPML files, and lex files. For additional information on FPML, the reader is referred to the following U.S. patent applications, the disclosures of which are incorporated by reference herein: Ser. No. 10/839,425 and Ser. No. 11/169,142. 
         [0038]    Active Lab is a visual tool (GUI) that allows the user to easily create and maintain a knowledge base without the necessity of knowing the actual FPML code. 
         [0039]    The discussion that follows provides some of the principles behind what ActiveAgent can do, and how it works. Instructions for physically putting these Concepts into the lab will come later, along with more advanced uses of each of these principles. 
         [0040]    Principles of a Knowledge Base 
         [0041]    To begin understanding how to create a knowledge base, we will start with the idea of an input and a response by ActiveAgent. Consider the following input and response:
       Input: How much does it cost to have a savings account?   Response: Our savings accounts are free to have, but do require that you maintain a balance of $300.       
 
       Units 
       [0044]    First, let&#39;s examine the response. The response is a known answer in the knowledge base. When a response is paired together with patterns that will trigger it, it is called a Unit. A group of Units can be categorized into Situation Groups which are similar to folders in Windows®, and are used mainly for organizational purposes due to the large number of responses a KB may have. 
         [0045]    Next, we must determine what questions should solicit that response. It turns out there are many different ways to phrase questions, all of which should be taken into account:
       Input:   How much does it cost to have a savings account? What&#39;s the price of a savings account?   $$ of a savings account?   Saving&#39;s accounts: cost?   Do I have to pay for savings accounts?   What are the restrictions of a savings account? Is there a minimum balance I have to maintain to   have a savings account? How much is a savings account?       
 
         [0053]    These questions are then listed with the Unit for the purposes of testing to make sure that when they are asked, this particular response is given. 
       Concepts 
       [0054]    A Concept is a breakdown of the critical ideas in a test question. In the above list of possible questions there seems to be three main themes: 
         [0000]    Cost, Savings Account, and Minimum Balance. Notice that not all of these Concepts exist in every possible question. Some questions have the idea of Cost, some Minimum Balance, and all have the Concept of Savings Account. To make a successful Unit, these Concepts are listed within the Unit and paired in such a way that this combination of Concepts is unique within the KB. This is called a Pattern. A Unit may have multiple patterns featuring different combinations of Concepts. For example:
       Cost AND Savings Account=Unit Response   Minimum Balance AND Savings Account=Unit Response       
 
         [0057]    Note that a pattern for a Unit includes at least one Concept, however it is not recommended to have more than four Concepts in a pattern. A Concept is made up mostly of Vocab, Helper Terms, and Building Blocks, which are described individually below. 
       Vocab 
       [0058]    A Vocab is a grouping of unambiguous synonyms and misspellings. The name of a particular grouping of synonyms is known as a Vocab Term. Vocab Terms are usually end with the suffix “vocab.”
       AccountVocab
           Account   Accounts   Accounts   Account&#39;s   PriceVocab   Price   Prices   Prise   Prises   Cost   Costs   Cost&#39;s   
               
 
         [0072]    In the example of PriceVocab, the word cost is included because for this KB the user wants the words price and cost to be synonymous. 
       Helper Terms 
       [0073]    A Helper Term is a word that has no unambiguous synonyms, however functions almost the same way as a Vocab, and mostly consists of conjunctions. Here are some examples of common Helper Terms:
       and   is   for   the       
 
       Building Blocks 
       [0078]    A Building Block is a list of either Vocab/Helper Terms or a list of Concepts that may be useful categorized together. As an example, consider the following:
       Anatomy (Vocab Building Block):
           armvocab   legvocab   headvocab   shouldervocab   feetvocab   
               
 
         [0085]    Now that these Vocab Terms are bundled together, they can be used in a Concept pattern. Here is an example use of a Vocab Building Block:
       surgeryvocab AND Anatomy (Building Block)   brokenvocab AND myvocab AND Anatomy (Building Block)       
 
         [0088]    In this example, because the Anatomy Building Block contained five Vocab Terms, it turned what would have been ten patterns into two. Also notice that Vocab Terms, which include all the synonyms and misspellings, are also included in this example. As another example, consider the following:
       Types of Accounts (Concept Building Block)
           Savings Accounts   Checking Accounts   Money Market Accounts   Investment Accounts   
               
 
         [0094]    This Building Block would then be used to reduce the number of patterns necessary. 
       Creating Concepts 
       [0095]    A Concept is made of patterns of Vocab, Helper Terms, and Building Blocks listed within the Concept. Here are the patterns that would make up the Savings Account Concept:
       savingsvocab AND accountvocab   accountvocab AND for AND savingsvocab   interestvocab AND bearingvocab AND accountvocab       
 
         [0099]    Notice that the word “for” is a Helper Term and does not end with the suffix “vocab.” In Concepts, two things that are important are Order and Proximity, both of which are optional when creating any given pattern. 
         [0100]    If Order is selected, a pattern will only trigger if it is received in that order. For example, a person would have to type in “savings account” to trigger the above example. If a person typed in “account savings” this pattern would not trigger because it is not in the correct order. 
         [0101]    If Proximity is selected, a pattern will only trigger if the inputs are received next to each other. For example, a person would have to type in “savings account” to trigger the above example. If a person typed in “savings in my account” the pattern would not trigger because “savings” and “account” were not typed in next to each other. 
         [0102]    Note that for most input patterns, it is important to have both Order and Proximity selected. In the above example, “Savings Account” has a very different meaning than “Account Savings” and “Savings in my Account.” Concepts also have their own associated test questions similar to Units for the purposes of testing. 
         [0103]    Examples of Savings Account test questions can include:
       Do you have savings accounts at your bank?   What&#39;s a savings account?   Do you have any interest bearing accounts?       
 
       The Unit, Concept, and Vocab Relationship 
       [0107]    The relationship between these principles can be stated simply:
       Units are made of patterns of Concepts.   Concepts are made of patterns of Vocab and Helper Terms.   Vocabs are made of lists of synonyms.       
 
         [0111]    The biggest benefit of this system is its flexibility. Once a Vocab has been created, it can be used in any number of Concepts, and once a Concept is created, it can be used in any number of Units. Conversely, any Unit or Concept can have any number of patterns, and the same Vocab or Concept can be used multiple times within each Unit or Concept. 
         [0112]      FIGS. 1-3  show a visual representation of the relationship between all of these principles, as well as the ways Helper Terms and Building Blocks can also apply. 
         [0113]    In  FIG. 1 , input patterns for Units can contain any number of combinations of Concepts, Building Blocks, and Helper Terms. The most common input patterns contain combinations of Concepts, with Building Blocks and Helper Terms used less often. 
         [0114]    In  FIG. 2 , input patterns for Concepts can contain any number of combinations of Vocab, Building Blocks, and Helper Terms. The most common input patterns contain combinations of Vocab, with Building Blocks and Helper Terms used less often. 
       Context IQ Engine 
       [0115]    The Context IQ Engine (CIE) is a term used to describe the part of ActiveAgent that actually does the processing of the FPML code written using Active Lab. The CIE has different functions relative to FPML code, and part of Active Lab is determining which functions to use, and in what order. 
       Cascades 
       [0116]    Completing a single process through use of the CIE is known as a cascade. Any numbers of cascades can, and usually do, run every time the FPML is activated. 
         [0117]    Here is an example of the simplest set of cascades necessary for a virtual agent:
       Pre-Vocab—a cascade that takes in contractions and outputs separate words.   Vocab—a cascade that takes in all synonyms and outputs Vocab.   Post-Vocab—a cascade that takes in separate compound words and outputs single Vocab words.   Concept—a cascade that takes in Vocab, and Helper Terms and outputs Concepts.   Unit—a cascade that takes in Concepts and outputs the response.       
 
         [0123]    In this example, each cascade is necessary for a single person&#39;s input to output a response, and can do very different things. The Vocab cascade only does substitution; it inputs words and outputs Vocab. The Concept cascade inputs Vocab and Helper Terms, and then outputs all Concepts that have patterns that include those terms. This is known as Match All because it outputs all matches, not just the most accurate one. The Unit cascade inputs Concepts, but only outputs one response. This is known as a Best Match and is a mathematical calculation done by the Context IQ Engine, with the Unit with the highest scoring pattern giving the response. 
       Static Files 
       [0124]    Static Files are individual FPML files that are written by hand without the help of Active Lab&#39;s user interface. The most common files include setups and teardowns, as well as a lex file that handles special cases that Active Lab is currently not set up to handle. These are most commonly established during the initial creation of the project, and usually don&#39;t need to be modified during general use. 
       Common Terms 
       [0125]    Within this document, the following terms are important to the proper understanding of Active Lab: 
         [0126]    Cascades—A cascade is a layer of FPML processing and is essentially a “mini” fpml runtime contained within a larger runtime. It contains most, if not all, the processing features available to a global runtime, including preprocessing, a specialized lexer, setups and teardowns, chunkers, unit nodes, functions, etc. 
         [0127]    Static Files—Static files are .fpml files that remain unchanged, such as lex files. 
         [0128]    Input Files—Input files are text files that list various user inputs that can be easily categorized, such as a list of names. 
         [0129]    Group—A group is a term that refers to separating similar items into smaller lists for organizational purposes. For example: a Concept Group is a group of similar Concepts. 
         [0130]    The following describes some aspects of an Active Lab Family and Concepts: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Active Lab 
                 Develops, edits, and manipulates 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge bases. 
               
               
                 Chat Review 
                 An application used to review chat logs 
               
               
                   
                 and make change requests to Active Lab. 
               
               
                 Approval Manager 
                 A web application used to approve 
               
               
                   
                 changes and change requests for 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge bases. 
               
               
                 FPML Database 
                 An archive of all the FPML used by the 
               
               
                   
                 lab and its sundry applications for a 
               
               
                   
                 given project. This database maybe a 
               
               
                   
                 SQL Server or PostgreSQL.. 
               
               
                 Chat Review Database 
                 An archive of all chats involving 
               
               
                   
                 knowledge bases created via Active Lab. 
               
               
                 Agent 
                 Agent is a program that enables the user 
               
               
                   
                 to place a KB on a website, simulating a 
               
               
                   
                 human being. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Basics of Active Lab 
       [0131]    The following describes the basic components of Active Lab in accordance with one or more embodiments. It also provides directions for getting started with Active Lab. 
       Components of Active Lab 
       [0132]    The main application window has several components that allow access to Active Lab features. The following table describes the main features of the illustrated main application window. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Dropdown Menu Bar 
                 Contains the following dropdown menus: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 File 
               
               
                   
                 View 
               
               
                   
                 Admin 
               
               
                   
                 Help 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Tabs 
                 The following tabs are found in Active 
               
               
                   
                 Lab: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Tests 
               
               
                   
                 Chat Review 
               
               
                   
                 Debugger 
               
               
                   
                 Concept Editor 
               
               
                   
                 Unit Editor 
               
               
                   
                 Editor 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Main Display 
                 Displays currently selected/active tab. 
               
               
                 Dockable Window display 
                 Dockable windows selected from View 
               
               
                   
                 are displayed here. 
               
               
                 Status Bar 
                 Status of the program is displayed here. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Menu Bar 
       [0133]    The menu bar contains four dropdown menus: File, View, Admin, and Help, which include the sub-menus illustrated in  FIG. 5  and described in the following table: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Menu 
                 Selections 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 File 
                 →New project opens a Create New 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Project window 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →open project opens a Browse 
               
               
                   
                 window 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 to select an existing project (*.proj) file. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →close project closes currently 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 open project 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Force Generate All Fpml Loads 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 all the FPML from the database 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the open project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Generate Fpml (Changes Only) 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Loads only those portions of the FPML 
               
               
                   
                   
                 database associated with the open 
               
               
                   
                   
                 project that have been changed. 
               
               
                   
                 View 
                 Each of the selections in the View menu 
               
               
                   
                   
                 opens the dockable window of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 same name. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Admin 
                 →Application Data opens the Application 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Editor window. Note: you must have a 
               
               
                   
                 project loaded in order to use this 
               
               
                   
                 selection. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Deployment 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Deploy Fpml opens the Deploy 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Fpml window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →configure Deployment opens the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Deployment Configuration window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Deploy to Content Management 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 opens the Deploy to Content 
               
               
                   
                 Management window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Generate Deployment Files creates 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Agent configuration files independent of 
               
               
                   
                 deployment. Not needed when 
               
               
                   
                 deploying. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  →Fpml Reports 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Fpml Statistics creates an Excel 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 spreadsheet that includes percentage 
               
               
                   
                 passed of all Situation Groups, along 
               
               
                   
                 with other statistics. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Print Unit Prints all Units and 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 their test questions. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Manage Users opens the Manage 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Users window. Note: You must have a project 
               
               
                   
                 loaded in order to use this selection. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Print Status 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →set Print Status 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Test Sets the users print status to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  test. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Production Sets the users 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  print status to production. 
               
               
                   
                 →View Promotion Suggestions opens 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 the Print Status window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Project Files opens the Project Files 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Remove Cached Files From Database 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 removes all FPML files that are cached for 
               
               
                   
                 local use. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Text To Speech opens the Text-To- 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Speech File Management window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →View/Edit Load Order opens the Load 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Order window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Help 
                 →About displays version 
               
               
                   
                   
                 information for the software. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0134]    All activity begins with the File menu. 
       Dockable Windows 
       [0135]    The dockable windows are the set of windows normally positioned on the right hand side of Active Lab, with each window differentiated by its own tab at the bottom. All dockable windows are opened and closed via the View menu. They may be docked on either the right side of the screen or the top, or allowed to float freely. When docked, multiple windows can be accessed through their corresponding tabs. The following table describes the components available through the dockable windows feature. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Building 
                 View →Building Blocks opens or closes 
               
               
                 Blocks 
                 the Building Blocks dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 This window displays all of the available 
               
               
                   
                 Building Blocks. 
               
               
                 Cascades 
                 View →cascades opens or closes 
               
               
                   
                 Cascades. This window displays all 
               
               
                   
                 the Vocab files, Concepts, and Units 
               
               
                   
                 in relationship to one another. 
               
               
                 Change 
                 View →change Requests opens or 
               
               
                 Requests 
                 closes 
               
               
                   
                 Change Requests. This window allows 
               
               
                   
                 the user to view the change requests 
               
               
                   
                 made over the duration of the project&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 existence. 
               
               
                 Components 
                 View →components opens or closes 
               
               
                   
                 Components. This window allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user 
               
               
                   
                 to view and change all the Variables, 
               
               
                   
                 Functions, AppCalls, and Record Lists that 
               
               
                   
                 are available for the project. 
               
               
                 Concepts 
                 View →concepts opens or closes 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts. This window displays all of the 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts within their respective groups, and 
               
               
                   
                 allows the user to edit existing Concepts and 
               
               
                   
                 create new Concepts and Concept Groups. 
               
               
                 Directives 
                 View→Directives opens or closes 
               
               
                   
                 Directives. This window displays all of the 
               
               
                   
                 available Units that are the top most Unit in a 
               
               
                   
                 directive. 
               
               
                 Dynamic 
                 View →Dynamic Functions opens or 
               
               
                 Functions 
                 closes Dynamic Functions. This window 
               
               
                   
                 displays all the Dynamic Functions 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the project, and allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to create and edit them. 
               
               
                 Helper 
                 View →Helper Terms opens or closes 
               
               
                 Terms 
                 Helper Terms. This window displays all of the 
               
               
                   
                 available Helper Terms, and allows the user to 
               
               
                   
                 create and edit Helper Terms. 
               
               
                 Input Files 
                 View →Input Files opens or closes Input 
               
               
                   
                 Files. This window displays all the input 
               
               
                   
                 files associated with a given project, and 
               
               
                   
                 allows the user to create and edit them. 
               
               
                 Knowledge 
                 View →Knowledge Tree opens or closes 
               
               
                 Tree 
                 Knowledge Tree. This window allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to create a Knowledge Tree hierarchy to 
               
               
                   
                 organize Concepts and potential Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 for personal organization purposes. 
               
               
                 Lex Types 
                 View →Lex Types opens or closes Lex 
               
               
                   
                 Types. This window allows the user to view 
               
               
                   
                 the lex types associated with a given project. 
               
               
                 Resource 
                 View →Resource Files opens or closes 
               
               
                 Files 
                 Recourse Files. This window allows the user 
               
               
                   
                 to view and edit all the resource files, or non 
               
               
                   
                 FPML files, in the project. 
               
               
                 Response 
                 View →Response Blocks opens or closes 
               
               
                 Blocks 
                 Response Blocks. This window allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to view and manipulate Response 
               
               
                   
                 Blocks. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 View →search Control opens or closes 
               
               
                 Control 
                 Search Control. This window allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to search for Units, Concepts, and 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab by phrase, dependency, and name. 
               
               
                   
                 Open by Default 
               
               
                 Static 
                 View →static Files opens or closes Static 
               
               
                 Files 
                 Files. This window allows the user to view and manipulate 
               
               
                   
                 static files. 
               
               
                 Test 
                 View →Test Conditions opens or closes 
               
               
                 Conditions 
                 Test Conditions. This window allows the user to manipulate 
               
               
                   
                 the value of Variables for the purposes of testing. 
               
               
                 Unit 
                 View →unit Search opens Unit Search. 
               
               
                 Search 
                 This window displays a search view of all Units, and allows 
               
               
                   
                 the user to search for Unit responses by Concepts. 
               
               
                 Units 
                 View →units opens or closes Units. This 
               
               
                   
                 window displays all of the available Units, and allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to edit existing Units and create new Units. 
               
               
                 Unprintable 
                 View →unprintable Items opens or 
               
               
                 Items 
                 closes Unprintable Items. This window displays those 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Terms, Concepts, and Units that are unprintable, 
               
               
                   
                 either by virtue of being blank, or because of some error. 
               
               
                 Unused 
                 View →unused Items opens or closes 
               
               
                 Items 
                 Unused Items. This window displays items that are in the 
               
               
                   
                 database but not associated with the open project. 
               
               
                 Urls 
                 View →urls opens or closes Uris. This 
               
               
                   
                 window displays all of the available URLs, and allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to edit, create, and delete URLs. 
               
               
                 Vocab 
                 View →Vocab opens or closes Vocab. 
               
               
                   
                 This window displays all of the Vocab Terms available in 
               
               
                   
                 addition to all of their constituent synonyms, and allows the 
               
               
                   
                 user to edit existing Vocab Terms and create new Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 Terms. 
               
               
                 Wild Cards 
                 View →Wild Cards opens or closes Wild 
               
               
                   
                 Cards. This window provides the user with access to Wild 
               
               
                   
                 Cards. 
               
               
                 Web Links 
                 View →web Links opens or closes Web Links. This 
               
               
                   
                 window displays all Web Links associated with the project, 
               
               
                   
                 and allows the user to create and edit them. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Searches 
       [0136]    Searches enable users to find Concepts and Units by words occurring within their input patterns and/or responses (as appropriate). This sub-section discusses the components of Search and Unit Search. With respect to  FIG. 6 , the following describes how search functionality works in accordance with one or more embodiments.
       1. Type in a word or phrase in the Search field of the Search dockable window.   2. Press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Update&gt;, which will add the phrase the “Phrases” tree in the main window.   3. Repeat steps 1-2 as often as desired.   4. Click &lt;Search Now&gt;.   5. The results will appear in the top pane, organized by Unit, Concept, and Vocab.       
 
         [0142]    Search contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens selected item for 
               
               
                   
                 editing. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove from Search&gt;: Deletes 
               
               
                   
                 selected phrase from search criteria. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Now&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Clear All&gt;: Clears all phrases from 
               
               
                   
                 search. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Display 
                 Displays search phrases, Vocab inside and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 outside of blocks, Building Blocks, Helper 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Terms inside and outside of blocks, Concepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 inside and outside of blocks. 
               
               
                   
                 Search Field 
                 Type search phrase here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt; 
                 Adds search phrase to search. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0143]    With respect to performing a search, consider the following. Searches in dockable windows only find text that appears in the display names of individual items. Performing a search in a normal dockable window uses the following procedure:
       1. In the dockable window&#39;s Search field, type in the desired text.   2. Click           &lt;Search&gt;.   3. The results will appear in the display list highlighted in red.       
 
         [0147]    Searching for text that occurs within the makeup of a Concept or Unit requires the use of Search and Unit Search, respectively. 
         [0148]    To run a search for a Concept, use the following procedure:
       1. In Search, type a phrase in the Search field.   2. Click &lt;Update&gt; to add the phrase to the search.   3. Repeat steps 1 &amp; 2 as often as desired.   4. Ensure that the FPML for the project is up-to-date by clicking           &lt;Generate FPML&gt;.   5. Click           &lt;Search Now&gt; to run the search for all the phrases added to the search. Search results will appear in the display.       
 
         [0154]    To run a search for a Unit in the Unit Search dockable window, use the following procedure:
       1. In Unit Search dockable window, type a Concept name into the Search field. This will add the Concept to the Concepts display.   2. Select either &lt;Filter On Patterns&gt; or &lt;Filter On Units&gt;.   3. Repeat steps 1 &amp; 2 as often as needed.   4. Click           &lt;Search Units Containing Concepts&gt;.   5. Results appear in the Search Results display.       
 
         [0160]    To run a search for a Unit in the Unit Search window, use the following procedure:
       1. In Unit Search, type a Concept name or phrase into the Input field.   2. Select either &lt;Match All&gt; or &lt;Match Any&gt;.   3. Repeat steps 1 &amp; 2 as often as needed.   4. Click &lt;Search&gt;.   5. Results appear in the Units Containing Input Concepts and Response Concepts displays.       
 
       Tabs 
       [0166]    Active Lab&#39;s main window contains five main tabs, in addition to the dockable windows described above. A brief description of each can be found in the following table. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Tests 
                 Allows the user to view the status of all the tests 
               
               
                   
                 in a given project, specifically those for Units and 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts. From this tab, the user may run all of 
               
               
                   
                 the tests at once. 
               
               
                 Debugger 
                 Allows the user to interact with the FPML, 
               
               
                   
                 and to view the causes of errors in Units, 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts, and Vocab. The debugger also 
               
               
                   
                 displays match data for Vocab, Concepts, and 
               
               
                   
                 Units. 
               
               
                 Concept Editor 
                 Provides an interface for building and 
               
               
                   
                 maintaining Concepts, including test 
               
               
                   
                 questions, input patterns, and components. 
               
               
                 Units Editor 
                 Provides an interface for building and 
               
               
                   
                 maintaining Units, including test questions, input 
               
               
                   
                 patterns, components and responses. 
               
               
                 Editor 
                 Allows the user to create and edit lex files 
               
               
                   
                 and raw FPML. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Status Bar 
       [0167]    The status bar, located at the bottom of the main window, shows the operations currently being undertaken by the program, and the current progress. An example of this is shown in  FIG. 7 . 
         [0168]    The full utility of Active Lab comes when handling knowledge bases (KBs). There are many things to take into consideration when creating a KB, including defining the scope, domain, and terminology surrounding the KB. Conversation directions should also be laid out before creating the KB in Active Lab. Other preparations vary depending on the specific KB. The section below entitled “Project Management” provides additional information in this regard. For information on modifying KBs directly, reference should be made to the sections below entitled “Vocabulary”, “Concepts” and “Units”. 
       Project Management 
       [0169]    Each project represents an FPML knowledge base (KB) storage configuration, which tells lab what databases to use for the KB components, which comprise Units, Concepts, and Vocabulary. Active Lab features many means by which the user can create, edit, view, and manipulate aspects of a project. This section details the configuration of KBs through the file menu options, the file menu, searches, administrating a project, and cascades. 
       Projects 
       [0170]    Projects serve as a collection of configuration information for a KB, enabling the user to manipulate the KB through Active Lab. Each project is connected to a database, where all of its constituent components are stored. Multiple projects can work from the same database. 
         [0171]    Create New Project is accessed through the File menu by selecting New Project. This window allows the user to specify the foundational specifications of the project. Create New Project contains two tabs: Project Info, and Chat Review. As an example, consider  FIG. 8  which shows an example “Create New Project” Window”. Create New Project contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Tabs 
                 The following tabs are provided to allow 
               
               
                   
                   
                 you to configure the project: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Project Info 
               
               
                   
                 Chat Review 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Create Project&gt; 
                 Creates a project file with the specified 
               
               
                   
                   
                 configurations. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the window without 
               
               
                   
                   
                 creating a project. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0172]    Project Info allows you to set the basic parameters of the project, including the name of the project, its local file directory, the project&#39;s database connection settings, user settings, and web server and subversion servers. Project Info contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Application Name 
                 This text field contains the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 project. 
               
               
                 Local File 
                 This field contains a text field displaying 
               
               
                 Directory 
                 the location on your local machine where the 
               
               
                   
                 project&#39;s FPML files will be stored. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; opens a Browse for Folder window, 
               
               
                   
                 where you can select the desired Local File 
               
               
                   
                 Directory. 
               
               
                 Lex File Source 
                 This field contains a text field displaying 
               
               
                   
                 the location on your local machine where the 
               
               
                   
                 project&#39;s lex file will be stored. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; opens a Browse for Folder window, 
               
               
                   
                 where you can select the desired Local File 
               
               
                   
                 Directory. 
               
               
                 Database 
                 Displays the following fields: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Connection 
                 Database Type: This drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                 indicates the type of database the 
               
               
                   
                 project will use: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MsSqlServer 
               
               
                   
                 PostgreSQL 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Server Name: This text field contains 
               
               
                   
                 the IP or DNS name of the server housing 
               
               
                   
                 the database. 
               
               
                   
                 Database Name: This text field 
               
               
                   
                 contains the name of the database. 
               
               
                   
                 User Name: This text field contains the 
               
               
                   
                 user ID used to connect to the database. 
               
               
                   
                 Password: This text field contains 
               
               
                   
                 the password used with the User 
               
               
                   
                 Name to connect to the database. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Web Server Path 
                 Will append all Url relative paths with Web 
               
               
                   
                 Server Path. This means that all Urls without a full 
               
               
                   
                 path will have the Web Server Path appended to 
               
               
                   
                 the front of it. 
               
               
                 Text to Speech File 
                 Location of Text-To-Speech files. 
               
               
                 Share 
                   
               
               
                 &lt;Create Project&gt; 
                 Creates the project 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the Create New Project window 
               
               
                   
                 without creating the project. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0173]    The Chat Review tab of Create New Project stores the location of Agent Chat Log databases. Chat Review contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Chat Servers 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Chat Servers display: List of chat 
               
               
                   
                 servers connected to Chat Review. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Removes Chat Server from 
               
               
                   
                 list. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Add Server 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display Name: This text field 
               
               
                   
                 contains the name of the chat 
               
               
                   
                 server. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Add&gt;: Add new Chat 
               
               
                   
                 Server 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Connection String: This text field 
               
               
                   
                 contains the connection string for 
               
               
                   
                 the new server. 
               
               
                   
                 Connection Provider: This drop- 
               
               
                   
                 down list provides selections for the 
               
               
                   
                 connection provider of the new 
               
               
                   
                 server. 
               
               
                   
                  Dialect: This drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                 provides selections for the dialect of 
               
               
                   
                 the new server. 
               
               
                   
                 Driver Class: This drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                 provides selections for the driver 
               
               
                   
                 class of the new server. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Project Files 
       [0174]    The database that the Knowledge Base is created from can have multiple projects associated with it. A project file is a file that can point to either part of or all of the database. When multiple users use identical project files, all those users will be working on the same part of the database (also known as the same project) at the same time. 
         [0175]    The Project Files window, accessed from the dropdown →Admin→Project Files, can be used to access all the different projects that have been saved in the database. When a user has already has a project open, this window will be filled out when opened. Clicking &lt;Connect&gt; will display all project files associated with the database. These project files can then be downloaded by highlighting them and clicking &lt;Download&gt;. 
         [0176]    Currently, most projects are stored on the same server with identical passwords. This means that if a user has a project open, they can view the project files of a different database simply by changing Database Name field and clicking 
         [0000]    &lt;Connect&gt;. With respect to the Project Files window, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 10 . 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Database to Search 
                  This field has the following components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Server field: Contains the IP 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 address where the database is 
               
               
                   
                 stored. Defaults to address of the 
               
               
                   
                 current project. 
               
               
                   
                 Database Name field: Contains the name 
               
               
                   
                 of the project. Default to 
               
               
                   
                 current project. 
               
               
                   
                 Database User Name field: Contains the 
               
               
                   
                 name of the user name 
               
               
                   
                 needed to access the database. 
               
               
                   
                 Default to current project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Database Password field: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Contains the password needed to 
               
               
                   
                 access the database. Default to current 
               
               
                   
                 project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Database Type dropdown: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Chooses from the available database 
               
               
                   
                 types: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 MsSQLServer 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 PostgreSQL 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Connect&gt;: Connects to the server and brings 
               
               
                   
                 up all available projects. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Application 
                 Field displays the name of the application 
               
               
                   
                 associated with project selected in Project 
               
               
                   
                 Files display. 
               
               
                 Project Files 
                 Shows all project files saved on the 
               
               
                 Display 
                 database. There are two icons that will appear: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Project File 
               
               
                   
                 No Project Files Found In Database 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Download 
                 Downloads selected project to a local site. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Application Data 
       [0177]    Application data can be viewed by selecting Application Data from the Admin menu. This selection opens up Application Editor, which displays the project name, the version of the project, and the lex file associated with it. Once a project has been opened, you can view and change parts of the configuration through Application Editor, as well as copy projects to and from the database. AS an example, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 11 . Application Editor has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Name 
                 Name of the project 
               
               
                 Version 
                 Version of the project. 
               
               
                 Approval Mode 
                 This dropdown sets the approval mode for the 
               
               
                   
                 project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 On 
               
               
                   
                 Off 
               
             
          
           
               
                 File Name 
                 Name of the associated lex file. This field 
               
               
                   
                 also contains the following button: 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Load File&gt;: This button opens a Browse 
               
               
                   
                 window to select a lex file for the project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Project File 
                 Sets project file to be saved in the database: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Project File is Saved in Database&gt;: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 check box that shows whether the 
               
               
                   
                 project file is currently saved in the 
               
               
                   
                 database. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Upload File&gt;: This button opens a 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Browse window to select a project 
               
               
                   
                 file. Chosen project file will be saved 
               
               
                   
                 to the database as a Project File 
               
               
                   
                 associated with that database. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Download&gt;: This button opens a 
               
               
                   
                 Browse window to save the project 
               
               
                   
                 file to a local location. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves changes. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Cancels changes. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Manage Users 
       [0178]    Selecting Manage Users from the Admin menu opens the Manage Users window, which allows a user to view and edit user information, specifically display name, login name, password, and user type. With respect to Manage Users, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 12 . Manage Users contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Edit User 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
               
                   
                   
                 User Login: Login name of 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 user. 
               
               
                   
                 Display Name: Display name of 
               
               
                   
                 selected user. 
               
               
                   
                 Password: Selected 
               
               
                   
                 user&#39;s password. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Change&gt;: Changes selected 
               
               
                   
                 user&#39;s password. 
               
               
                   
                 User Type: Drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                 selects user&#39;s type. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves changes to 
               
               
                   
                 selected user&#39;s properties. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt;: Cancels changes made 
               
               
                   
                 to selected user&#39;s properties. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Operations 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add User&gt;: Adds new user to 
               
               
                   
                 Users. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit User&gt;: Edits selected user. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete User&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 user. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Reset Password&gt;: Resets selected 
               
               
                   
                 user&#39;s password. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Users 
                 Display lists all users, with display name, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 login name, and user type. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Deployment 
       [0179]    Deployment is the process of moving all the FPML files associated with the project from a user&#39;s local copy to another location, usually to a test or production server. To configure the deployment, select Deployment→Configure Deployment from the Admin menu. This will open the Deployment Configuration window. The user can select a means by which the test environment manager can be notified of changes to the FPML. The files may be transferred either by direct e-mail to the test environment manager, or by copying the files to a shared directory. With respect to a Deploy FPML Window, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 13 . Deploy Fpml contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Change Version 
                 Changes the version number of the project 
               
               
                 Deployment Settings 
                 Display of Email server, Email list, 
               
               
                   
                 Notification list, and copy directory. 
               
               
                 Regenerate All Files 
                 If selected, all files are regenerated with 
               
               
                   
                 each update. 
               
               
                 &lt;Edit Configuration&gt; 
                 Edits deployment configuration. 
               
               
                 Deployment Status 
                 Display of deployment. Can be edited by 
               
               
                   
                 clicking in the window. 
               
               
                 &lt;Deploy&gt; 
                 Deploys the FPML to directory selected in 
               
               
                   
                 the Deployment Configuration window. 
               
               
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes Window 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0180]    A Deployment Configuration Window allows the user to set up the deployment configuration. This includes the destination folder, email settings, and whether to include copies or Text-to-Speech. With respect to this window, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 14 . Deployment Configuration contains four tabs across the top of the window (described in the table just below): 
       Copy Files, Email, Run External Program, and Commit To Subversion. 
       [0181]      
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Copy Files 
                 This tab contains the following items: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Enable Copy Files: If checked, 
               
               
                   
                 will activate file copy for 
               
               
                   
                 deployment. If 
               
               
                   
                 unchecked, this tab will be 
               
               
                   
                 grayed out. 
               
               
                   
                 Deployment Destination Folder: 
               
               
                   
                 Folder where FPML files will be 
               
               
                   
                 copied into when deployed. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Browse window to find 
               
               
                   
                 a shared directory. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Choose FPML Files To Copy: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Create and Copy Zip File&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 radio button: if selected, files 
               
               
                   
                 will be copied in compressed 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (*.zip) format. 
               
               
                   
                 Zip File Name: Type name 
               
               
                   
                 of(*.zip) file 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Copy Project Folder&gt; radio button: If 
               
               
                   
                 selected, files copied uncompressed. 
               
               
                   
                 Text-To-Speech: If check box 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Copy Text-To-Speech File Share 
               
               
                   
                 With Deployment: If selected, all 
               
               
                   
                 Text-to-Speech files will be included in the 
               
               
                   
                 deployment. 
               
               
                   
                 Create Deployment Log File: If check box 
               
               
                   
                 Create Deployment Log File is selected, a log 
               
               
                   
                 file will be 
               
               
                   
                 generated in the deployment. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Email 
                 This tab contains the following items: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Server Name: Name of the email server from which 
               
               
                   
                 the deployment 
               
               
                   
                 will be sent. Contact your system administrator for 
               
               
                   
                 more details. 
               
               
                   
                 Email From: E-mail address deployment notifications 
               
               
                   
                 will come 
               
               
                   
                 from. 
               
               
                   
                 Email Address List: Input field for all the e-mail 
               
               
                   
                 addresses that will be 
               
               
                   
                 notified when the project is deployed, one address 
               
               
                   
                 per line. 
               
               
                   
                 Attach Deployment Files With 
               
               
                   
                 Email: If selected, this option sends 
               
               
                   
                 the updated files to the users in the Address List as an 
               
               
                   
                 attached .zip file. Default: Not selected. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Run External 
                 This tab contains the following items: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Program 
                 Choose Program To Run: Type name of program that 
               
               
                   
                 will run when 
               
               
                   
                 FPML deployment is complete. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; Opens Browse 
               
               
                   
                 window to find file. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Commit To 
                 This tab contains the following items: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Subversion 
                 Commit Deployed Files to SVN: 
               
               
                   
                 Check box that indicates whether the 
               
               
                   
                 deployed files will be committed to Subversion, a file 
               
               
                   
                 management program. 
               
               
                   
                 Fpml Service Uri: Location of Web 
               
               
                   
                 Service that manages the FPML and 
               
               
                   
                 SVN integration. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves deployment configuration. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving 
               
               
                   
                 deployment configuration. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       FPML Reports 
       [0182]    Active Lab has functionality that creates documents that may be useful to the user. In one or more embodiments, there are two documents that Active Lab can create: FPML Statistics which is an Excel® spreadsheet displaying the percentage statistics of Unit test questions and Print Units which is an Excel® spreadsheet displaying all the Units along with their respective test questions. 
         [0183]    To create the FPML Statistics spreadsheet, follow these procedures in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 15 :
       1. Open FPML Statistics window by following Admin→FPML Reports→Fpml Statistics.   2. Type in destination folder and name of file to be created.   3. Select destination folder and document name by typing in Report File field, or by clicking &lt;Browse&gt; to open a browse window to find a destination folder.   4. Select Print Status of Test, Production, or InActive.   5. Click &lt;Generate&gt; to create file.       
 
         [0189]    FPML Statistics contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Report File 
                 Type destination folder and document 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name here. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; Opens Browse window to find a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 directory. 
               
               
                   
                 Print Status 
                  Contains three options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Print All Test&gt; 
                 Check to have all Unit tests from project 
               
               
                   
                   
                 printed in the document. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Generate&gt; 
                 Click to create the document 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes window without creating the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 document. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0190]    To create the FPML Units spreadsheet, follow these procedures in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 16 :
       1. Open Print Units window by following Admin→FPML Reports
           →Print   Units.   
           2. Select Print Status of Test, Production, or InActive.   3. Select destination folder and document name by typing in Output File field, or by clicking &lt;Browse&gt; to open a browse window to find a destination folder.   4. Click &lt;Generate&gt;       
 
         [0197]    Print Units contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Print Status 
                 Contains three options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 Test 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Output File 
                 Type destination folder and document 
               
               
                   
                   
                 name here 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; Opens Browse window to find a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 directory. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Generate&gt; 
                 Click to create the document 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes window without creating the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 document. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Text to Speech Management 
       [0198]    Text-To-Speech (TTS) refers to the ability to translate on-screen text into audio speech. TTS files can be generated automatically, or can be pre-recorded voice files. The Text-To-Speech File Management window allows the user to easily manage importing large sets of TTS files. 
         [0199]    Text-To-Speech File Management is accessed by selecting Text-To-Speech from Admin as indicated in the user interface of  FIG. 17 . Text-To-Speech File Management includes an overview section and five tabs as described below: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 TTS Overview 
                 This section displays statistics regarding 
               
               
                   
                 the status of Text-to-Speech files for 
               
               
                   
                 Units within the project 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Change Requests: Number of changed 
               
               
                   
                 responses needing new 
               
               
                   
                 TTS files. 
               
               
                   
                 Delete Requests: Number of TTS 
               
               
                   
                 files no longer used. 
               
               
                   
                 TTS File Needed: Number of responses 
               
               
                   
                 still needing TTS files. 
               
               
                   
                 Missing TTS File: Number of items that 
               
               
                   
                 have an assigned TTS 
               
               
                   
                 file, but the file cannot be located. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes TTS 
               
               
                   
                 Overview display. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Import Files 
                 This tab allows the user to import and 
               
               
                   
                 attach pre-recorded voice files to the project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Excel Import File: The file path to the 
               
               
                   
                 spreadsheet that identifies 
               
               
                   
                 Units with corresponding audio files. The 
               
               
                   
                 spreadsheet must be saved as an XML file. 
               
               
                   
                 Location of New Audio Files: 
               
               
                   
                 Directory where the audio files 
               
               
                   
                 are saved. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt;: Allows user to navigate to the 
               
               
                   
                 particular file or 
               
               
                   
                 directory location. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Start Import&gt;: Executes the import of 
               
               
                   
                 the audio files. 
               
               
                   
                 Status: Shows the results of the import. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Delete File Requests 
                 This tab allows the user to delete audio 
               
               
                   
                 files that are no longer used. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Delete File Requests&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Executes a search for all audio 
               
               
                   
                 files that are no longer assigned to 
               
               
                   
                 a Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Clear List in Database&gt;: Clears 
               
               
                   
                 the references to deleted files 
               
               
                   
                 from the database. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Files From Share&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Deletes the actual audio files 
               
               
                   
                 from the shared directories. 
               
               
                   
                 Display: Shows the unused 
               
               
                   
                 audio files to be deleted. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Change File Requests 
                 This tab allows the users to create an 
               
               
                   
                 XML file showing the Units with 
               
               
                   
                 responses that have changed since the last 
               
               
                   
                 audio recording. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Dump Change Requests to Xml 
               
               
                   
                 File&gt;: Creates an XML file that 
               
               
                   
                 can be opened in Excel listing the 
               
               
                   
                 Units with changed responses. 
               
               
                   
                 Status: Shows progress and 
               
               
                   
                 results of the file export. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 New File Requests 
                 This tab allows the user to send the new 
               
               
                   
                 requests to an Excel spreadsheet 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Dump New Requests to 
               
               
                   
                 Excel&gt;: Creates an XML file that 
               
               
                   
                 can be opened in Excel that lists all 
               
               
                   
                 of the new Units added since the last 
               
               
                   
                 time TTS files were imported. Once 
               
               
                   
                 updated with the audio file names, 
               
               
                   
                 this file can become the import file. 
               
               
                   
                 Status: Shows the progress and 
               
               
                   
                 results of the file export. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Missing TTS Files 
                 This tab allows the users to view items 
               
               
                   
                 that have an assigned audio file, but the 
               
               
                   
                 file cannot be found for some reason. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;View Missing Files&gt;: Executes 
               
               
                   
                 the search for missing files. 
               
               
                   
                 Display: Shows the results of the 
               
               
                   
                 missing file search. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Cascades 
       [0200]    A cascade represents a single function of the Context IQ Engine (CIE). Each cascade takes an input, processes that input through the CIE, and then gives an output. 
         [0201]    The order that the cascades are listed is very important because many cascades only take the output of previous cascades. When an input is received, it is processed through all cascades in the order listed on the View/Edit Load Order window. There are many different types of cascades, some of which are unique to a project. 
         [0202]    When it comes to Concepts and Units in particular, there are two types of outputs that are very important: One is called “Match All” and the other is called “Best Match.” A cascade that is set to “Match All” will output all matches to the input pattern that is received. A cascade that is set to “Best Match” will only have one output, which is calculated by the CIE based on the highest scoring pattern. If there is a tie in a “Best Match” cascade, then the output will be the last item that was calculated. 
         [0203]    Concepts Groups can be set to either “Match All” or “Best Match” depending on the user. The majority of Concepts are usually set into “Match All” cascades, because Units take the input of multiple Concepts. Concepts are usually set into “Best Match” cascades when their patterns are so similar that they almost always triggered at the same time. 
         [0204]    As an example, consider the following two Concepts—Home Equity and Home Equity Loan. The first Concept will always trigger because it will contain patterns that are also in the second Concept, therefore they should be put in their own “Best Match” cascade so only one can be outputted. 
         [0205]    Units must always be assigned to “Best Match” cascades. The reason for this is because the output of a Unit is a response. This way, when an input is received, only one response is outputted. 
         [0206]    Vocab is processed through the Context IQ Engine using cascades that only do substitution: it takes in a synonym replaces it with the name of its corresponding Vocab Term. This usually needs to be done three times for full effectiveness: the first time called the Pre-Vocab cascade where contractions are separated into separate words; the second time called the Vocab cascade where Vocab Terms are substituted for words; and a third time called the Post-Vocab cascade where multiple Vocab Term phrases are combined into single Vocab Terms, mainly for use in compound words. 
         [0207]    The Cascades dockable window, shown in  FIG. 18 , is where cascades are created and the type of output for cascades are determined. A user can also move items between cascades in this window. Cascades contain the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                  The button bar contains the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new cascade. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected cascade. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  cascade 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 from the project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;View/Modify Order&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                  View/Edit Load Order 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Cascades 
                 Display list of all available cascades and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 their constituents. Cascades 
               
               
                   
                   
                 are represented thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Cascade type 
               
               
                   
                  Cascade Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0208]    Cascades are organized by type. In Cascade Group Type, shown in  FIG. 19 , the user may edit the name, match type, response, behavior, pre-process action, and level settings. Cascade Group Type contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Name 
                 Text input field for the name of the group 
               
               
                 Match Type 
                 Drop-down list allows for selection of match 
               
               
                   
                 type. Choose from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Best: only output highest scoring match. 
               
               
                   
                 All: output all pattern matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Response 
                 Drop-down list allows for selection of response 
               
               
                   
                  from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Standard (Default) 
               
               
                   
                 Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Final 
               
               
                   
                 Can final 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Behavior 
                 Drop-down list allows for selection of behavior 
               
               
                   
                 from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Normal (Default) 
               
               
                   
                 Recursive 
               
               
                   
                 Search_replace 
               
               
                   
                 Stacked ——  cascades 
               
               
                   
                 Ignore cascades 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Pre-Process Action 
                 Drop-down list allows for selection of the pre- 
               
               
                   
                 process action from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Return (Default) 
               
               
                   
                 Internal 
               
               
                   
                 Can ——  final 
               
               
                   
                 Pre_pass_through 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Domain Object Type 
                 Drop-down list allows selection of what type of 
               
               
                   
                 object can inserted into the cascade group: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 All 
               
               
                   
                 Units 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 DynamicFunctions 
               
               
                   
                 DynamicFunctionsBestMatch 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Level 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Enable Levels checkbox: this should only 
               
               
                   
                 be used for cascades housing 
               
               
                   
                  dynamic functions. 
               
               
                   
                 Levels: this drop-down list allows for the 
               
               
                   
                 selection of levels. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves settings and closes window. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving settings. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0209]    Cascade Groups represent the primary grouping of all components of a KB. Cascade Group, as shown in the user interface of  FIG. 20 , allows the user to give the cascade group a name, the type of cascade it will be, as well as its print order. Cascade Group contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Text input field for the name of the cascade 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Drop-down list for selection of cascade 
               
               
                   
                   
                 type. Choose from any cascade group 
               
               
                   
                   
                 created for the project. 
               
               
                   
                 Print Status 
                 Set Print Status of the cascade to one of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 three options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Print Order 
                 Print order of the cascade. This affects 
               
               
                   
                   
                 when its components will trigger in relation to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the other cascades. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves settings and closes window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving settings. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Load Order 
       [0210]    Selecting View/Edit Load Order from the Admin menu opens the Application Load Order window as shown in  FIG. 21 . Load Order determines what order static files and cascades are processed when an input is received. This window allows the user to drag and drop Vocab, Unit, and Concept Groups into different cascades. This ordering is very important because some cascades take the input of what other cascades output. Application Load Order has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 &lt;Remove Selected 
                 Removes the highlighted from the project. 
               
               
                 Item From application&gt; 
               
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves any changes to load order and closes 
               
               
                   
                 the window. 
               
               
                 &lt;Refresh&gt; 
                 Refreshes window. 
               
               
                 &lt;New Window&gt; 
                 Opens new Application Load Order 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; 
                 Collapses tree to smallest size. 
               
               
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; 
                 Expands tree to maximum size. 
               
               
                 Main Window 
                 Tree view of all items in the project in their 
               
               
                   
                 load order. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Unused Items 
       [0211]    An Unused Item is an item contained in the database, but not used in the current project. This can occur in many ways: newly created projects that point to an existing database will show all the items in that database as unused; and groups ofVocab, Units, and Concepts can be removed from a project, but not from the database, so they can be available for other projects. 
         [0212]    In the Unused Items dockable window, as shown in  FIG. 22 , the user can view all items in the database that are not included in the existing project. This window also allows these items to be added to the current project by selecting→Add To Application from the right-click menu. The Unused Items dockable window contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected item. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected item. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Note: 
               
               
                   
                  Currently not supported. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Unused 
               
               
                   
                 Items display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward 
               
               
                   
                 Navigation&gt;: Navigates 
               
               
                   
                 between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Unused Items 
                 Displays all items in the database not 
               
               
                   
                   
                 used by the current project. The 
               
               
                   
                   
                 following is a list of all the different 
               
               
                   
                   
                 possible Unused Item types. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Vocab Groups 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Terms 
               
               
                   
                 Concept Groups 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 Situation Group 
               
               
                   
                 Units 
               
               
                   
                 Static Files 
               
               
                   
                 Input Files 
               
               
                   
                 Cascades 
               
               
                   
                 Resource Files 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Search Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Right-Click Menu 
                 Unused Items contains the following 
               
               
                   
                   
                 right-click menu: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 → Edit: Open edit 
               
               
                   
                 window corresponding selected 
               
               
                   
                 item. 
               
               
                   
                 → Delete: Delete selected 
               
               
                   
                 item from the database. 
               
               
                   
                  →Add To Application: Adds 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  selected item to the current project. Item 
               
               
                   
                  will appear in its corresponding dockable 
               
               
                   
                  window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Resource Files 
       [0213]    The Resource Files dockable window, as shown in  FIG. 23 , allows the user to view and edit all the Resource Files, or non-FPML files, in the project. 
         [0214]    The Resource Files dockable window contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Add&gt;: Opens Resource File 
               
               
                   
                  Editor. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens selected Resource file 
               
               
                   
                  in Editor tab. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                  Resource File. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Browse For Folder&gt;: Opens a 
               
               
                   
                  Browse window to search for 
               
               
                   
                  Resource Files. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Resource 
               
               
                   
                  Files display. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                  current window. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                  tree. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                  Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Resource Files 
                 Displays all Resource Files in the project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Resource Files 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                  specific text. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                  Options window. 
               
               
                   
                  Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                  Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                  matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Right-Click Menu 
                 Resource Files contains the following 
               
               
                   
                  right-click 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 menu: 
               
               
                   
                 →Add 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Resource File: Opens 
               
               
                   
                  Resource File 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Editor. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Directory: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Browse window to 
               
               
                   
                 search for new Resource 
               
               
                   
                 File 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → 
               
               
                   
                  Edit 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Properties: Opens 
               
               
                   
                  Resource File 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Editor. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 File Contents: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 selected Resource File 
               
               
                   
                 in Editor tab. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 → Delete: Delete selected file. 
               
               
                   
                 → Remove From 
               
               
                   
                  Application: Removes selected 
               
               
                   
                  file from current project, but 
               
               
                   
                  does not delete it from the 
               
               
                   
                  database. 
               
               
                   
                 → Show Applications: 
               
               
                   
                  Displays all application that use 
               
               
                   
                  selected file. 
               
               
                   
                 → Replace Text 
               
               
                   
                 → Replace In All Files: Opens 
               
               
                   
                  Replace Text window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0215]    This section provides detailed instructions for creating projects and interacting with the project management tools. To create a new project, use the following procedure in connection with the user interfaces shown in  FIGS. 24 and 25 :
       1. Select File→New Project to open a Create New
           Project   window.   
           2. Type the Application Name.   3. Click &lt;Browse&gt; under Local File Directory to select a local directory where the FPML files will be generated, or type the path in the Local File Directory text field.   4. Click &lt;Browse&gt; under Lex Field Source to select a local directory where the lex file will be found, or type the path in the Local File Directory text field.   5. Configure the Database Connection as follows:
           a. Select the Database Type from the dropdown menu   b. Type in the Server Name in the appropriate field.   c. Type in the Database Name in the appropriate field.   d. Type in the User Name of your choice in the appropriate field.   e. Type in the Password.   
           6. Type in the Web Server Path or skip to step 6.   7. Type in the Subversion Service or skip to step 7.   8. Click on Chat Review or skip to step 9.   9. Configure the Chat Review as follows:
           a. Type in the Display Name of the chat server.   b. Type in the Connection String of the chat server.   c. Select the Connection Provider for the chat server.   d. Select the Dialect for the chat server.   e. Select the Driver for the chat server.   f. Click &lt;Add&gt;.   g. Repeat steps a-g for each chat server to be added.   
           10. Click &lt;Create Project&gt; to open the new project, or click &lt;Cancel&gt; to exit the Create New Project window without creating a new project.       
 
         [0240]    To opening an existing project, using the user interface of  FIG. 24 , complete the following actions:
       1. Select File open Project   2. Browse for the project (*.proj) you want to open.   3. Click &lt;Open&gt; to open the selected project, or click &lt;Cancel&gt; to continue without opening a project.       
 
         [0244]    Within Active Lab, configuration settings that may be changed are found in Application Editor. To change these configurations, use the following procedure:
       1. Select Application Data from the Admin menu to open
           Application   Editor.   
           2. Make any changes desired to the Name or skip to step 3.   3. Make any changes desired to the Version or skip to step 4.   4. Make any changes desired to the Approval       
 
         [0251]    Mode or skip to step 5.
       5. Change the lex file using the following procedure or skip to step 6.
           a. Click &lt;Load File&gt; to open a Browse window.   b. Browse to the desired location and select the lex file.   c. Click &lt;Open&gt;.   
           6. Click &lt;Upload File&gt; to open a Browse window that will select an existing project or skip to step 7.   7. Click &lt;Download File&gt; to open a Browse window to save the project as a (*.proj) file in selected directory or skip to step 8.   8. Click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save changes OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving changes.       
 
         [0259]    Project deployment involves sending the project files from one location to another, usually from the user&#39;s local hard drive to a test or production environment. There are two methods of deployment: by email or by copying the project files to a shared directory. You may select one or both of these methods as the situation warrants. 
         [0260]    Before deploying a project, the following steps can be used to ensure a stable set.
       1. Click &lt;Generate All FPML&gt; or select→File→Force Generate All FPML.   2. Wait for FPML generation to complete.   3. Close Active Lab.   4. Reopen Active Lab.   5. Open the project by selecting File→open Project and browsing to project file.       
 
         [0266]    Once the above steps have been completed, it is very important not to do any other activity in Active Lab before you deploy, or it may interfere with the deployment. This means that after opening the project, you continue directly to the following steps, without doing any other activity.
       1. Select Admin→Deployment→Deploy FPML open Deploy FPML window as shown in  FIG. 26 .   2. Click &lt;Change Version&gt; to open Application Editor ( FIG. 27 ).   3. Edit Version field to desired number.       
 
         [0270]    Click &lt;Save&gt;. Window will close.
       4. Return to Deploy FPML window.   5. Click &lt;Edit Configuration&gt; to open Deployment Configuration window ( FIG. 28 ) or skip to step 24.   6. Click &lt;Enable Copy Files&gt; to deploy to a shared directory, or skip to step 12.   7. Type or browse to the Deployment Destination Folder of your choice. This is where the deployed files will be copied.   8. Select Create and Copy Zip File or Copy Project Folder.
           a. If Create and Copy Zip File is selected, enter Zip File Name in appropriate field.   
           9. Select Copy Text-To-Speech File Share With Deployment (Optional).   10. Select Create Deployment Log File (Optional).   11. Click Email tab ( FIG. 29 ) or skip to step 18.   12. Type the Server Name in the first field. This should be your local network email server.   13. Type the e-mail address the e-mail will originate from in the second field.   14. Type in the email address to which the pertinent files will be sent in the Email Address List.   15. Repeat step 10 as often as desired, one address per line.   16. Select Attach Deployment Files With Email to ensure that the files will be sent. If this is not selected, the addresses listed will only receive a notification.   17. Click Run External Program tab ( FIG. 30 ) or skip to step 20.   18. Type in or browse to appropriate file.   19. Click Commit To Subversion tab or skip to step 22.   20. Click &lt;Commit Deployed Files to SVN&gt;. (Optional)   21. Click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save the deployment settings. The window will close   22. Return to Deploy FPML window.   23. Examine the Deployment Settings to ensure that all is in order.   24. Examine Deployment Status. If it reads “Ready To Deploy,” click &lt;Deploy&gt;.       
 
       Creating a List of Units Requiring Audio Files 
       [0293]    When the Unit responses have been finalized, one can generate a spreadsheet of the ones requiring new audio files. If you have previously imported voice files, this will be a two step process. First, generate a list of new requests; and secondly, generate a list of responses changed since the last recording. 
         [0294]    New Requests:
       1. Admin→Text-To-Speech to open Text-To-Speech File Management.   2. Click on New File Requests tab   3. Click &lt;Dump New Requests to Excel&gt;.   4. Click &lt;OK&gt; in response to the “Please Choose an xml file” window.   5. In the Save As window, choose a name and location for the file. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   6. The file will be created and the results displayed in the Status field.       
 
         [0301]    Changed Responses:
       1. Admin Text-To-Speech to open Text-To-Speech File Management.   2. Click on Change File Requests tab   3. Click &lt;Dump Change Requests to Xml File&gt;.   4. Click &lt;OK&gt; in response to the “Please Choose an xml file” window.   5. In the Save As window, choose a name and location for the file. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   6. The file will be created and the results displayed in the Status field.       
 
         [0308]    When updated with the names of the audio files, these spreadsheets can be used as TTS import files. 
       Vocabulary 
       [0309]    Active Lab uses vocabulary to allow the user a way to define important terms in a project as well as group synonyms together in order to streamline the Concept, Unit building, and maintenance process. This section contains a description of the details and principles surrounding vocabulary as well as instructions on creating and maintaining vocabulary within Active Lab. 
         [0310]    Vocabulary is at the core of defining a Knowledge Base. Concepts and Units build on the foundation of vocabulary. The purpose of vocabulary is to group synonymous words together to be used in formulating input patterns for Concepts and Units. Vocabulary also vastly streamlines the maintenance involved in managing a KB. 
         [0311]    The way that vocabulary is streamlined in the KB is by grouping synonyms together under a single label, called a Vocab Term. Synonyms can include any unambiguous synonyms, misspellings, tenses, pluralities, and/or possessive forms. Together, a list of Synonyms and its corresponding Vocab Term are known as a Vocab. 
         [0312]    Vocab functions as a substitution algorithm: when a word is entered, it is substituted for its corresponding Vocab Term. This way, only the Vocab Term needs to be used when creating patterns later on. Vocab Terms are organized into Vocab Groups, mainly for organizational purposes. Vocab Groups can then be assigned to different cascades. Vocab is primarily viewed in the Vocab dockable window (See  FIG. 31 ), which allows the user to view all the Vocab Terms associated with the currently open project. 
         [0313]    The Vocab dockable window contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Descriptio 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button Bar 
                  The button row contains the following buttons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new Vocab Term. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Vocab Editor with selected term 
               
               
                   
                 loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes the selected Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 Term, and all of its synonyms from the 
               
               
                   
                 project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows the Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 and Building Blocks that use the selected 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Term. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Vocab display and 
               
               
                   
                 collapses open groups. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of current 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Vocab display tree 
                  This tree shows vocabulary organized as follows: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Vocab Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Vocab Term 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Synonym 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Expand and Collapse: these expand and 
               
               
                   
                 collapse Vocab Groups to show Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 Terms, and Vocab Terms to show 
               
               
                   
                 synonyms. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search Options 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: Limits 
               
               
                   
                 search to complete word matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0314]    The Vocab dockable window has three different right-click menus (shown in  FIG. 32 ) that appear, based on whether one right-clicks on the Vocab Group, Vocab Term, or Synonym. The following selections are available: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Selection 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Add 
                 →Vocab Group: opens Add New 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Group. 
               
               
                   
                 →Vocab Term: opens Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 Editor. 
               
               
                   
                  →Synonym: Opens Vocab Editor 
               
               
                   
                 with highlighted Vocab loaded. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Edit 
                 Opens selected item for editing in its 
               
               
                   
                 respective window. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected item from the project. 
               
               
                 Show Applications 
                 Shows all applications that use selected 
               
               
                 (Vocab Group only) 
                 Vocab Group. 
               
               
                 Remove From Application 
                 Removes selected Vocab Group from 
               
               
                 (Vocab Group only) 
                 current project. Vocab Group can now be 
               
               
                   
                 found in Unused Items. 
               
               
                 Show Dependencies 
                 Shows all Concepts and Building Blocks 
               
               
                 (Vocab Term only) 
                 using the term. 
               
               
                 Create Concept 
                 Creates a Concept in the Concept tab using 
               
               
                   
                 current Vocab Term. 
               
               
                 View File 
                 Views FPML file containing current Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 Term in the Edit tab. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0315]    Vocab Groups are sets of Vocab Terms that are categorically similar. For instance, the Vocab Terms “dog,” “cat,” and “parrot” might be placed in a Vocab Group called “animals.” Vocab Groups are used to simplify Vocab management within cascades and projects. Individual groups can be added and removed from projects, and can be moved around, in, and between cascades. Each Vocab Term can only belong to one Vocab Group. 
         [0316]    The Add New Vocab Group window ( FIG. 33 ) consists of the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Group 
                 The desired group name. 
               
               
                   
                 Required 
                 Check to assign Vocab Group to a 
               
               
                   
                 Cascade Group 
                 The desired cascade group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;OK&gt; 
                 Confirms Vocab Group creation. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without creating new 
               
               
                   
                   
                 group. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0317]    Vocab Terms are used to simplify maintenance of Concepts and Units by converting all synonymous words into a single term. Thus, Vocab Terms act as a form of substitution. In cases of ambiguous synonyms, create two separate Vocab Terms to be placed in a Building Block together later on. Vocab Terms are created via the Vocab Editor (See  FIG. 34 ), which is accessed by either right-clicking in Vocab or by clicking &lt;Add&gt; in Vocab. The following are components found in the Vocab Editor window: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Function 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Group 
                 Drop-down list for the group to which 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the term will belong 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Term 
                  This field contains the following 
               
               
                   
                   
                 components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Button Row: Contains 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: adds term to 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: edits natural 
               
               
                   
                 language or term. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Shows all Concepts and 
               
               
                   
                 Building Blocks in which 
               
               
                   
                 the term appears. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Natural Language: Text field for 
               
               
                   
                 the word as it would appear 
               
               
                   
                 in natural language. 
               
               
                   
                 Term: Text field for the term as it 
               
               
                   
                 is listed in Vocab. Typically, 
               
               
                   
                 this ends in “-vocab” (“help” 
               
               
                   
                 would be “helpvocab”). 
               
               
                   
                 Add Plural Forms: Selection, if 
               
               
                   
                 checked, adds all terms 
               
               
                   
                 synonyms with an “s” on the 
               
               
                   
                 end. Default: not selected. 
               
               
                   
                 Add Possessive Forms: 
               
               
                   
                 Selection, if checked, adds a 
               
               
                   
                 version of each synonym ending in 
               
               
                   
                 “&#39;s.” 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Synonyms tab 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: list of all manually 
               
               
                   
                 typed synonyms in the term. 
               
               
                   
                 Input Field for the entry of 
               
               
                   
                 synonyms. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds synonym to 
               
               
                   
                 term. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Makes 
               
               
                   
                 changes to selected 
               
               
                   
                 synonym. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes 
               
               
                   
                 selected synonym. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt;: Cancels 
               
               
                   
                 changes made to 
               
               
                   
                 synonym. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Comments tab 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: The current comment for 
               
               
                   
                 the Vocab. 
               
               
                   
                 The comments display will be 
               
               
                   
                 marked with one of the 
               
               
                   
                  following icons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Currently no comments. 
               
               
                   
                 Comments exist for this 
               
               
                   
                 vocab. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 The following buttons are used: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Save current comments. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Clear Comments&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 clears all comments. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes the Vocab Editor window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0318]    Helper Terms are commonly used words and phrases that are used to build sentences, and have no synonyms or common misspellings, such as “is,” “or,” or “but.” Helper Terms are also used for words that should not be made into Vocab, especially those that are only necessary for a single Concept or Unit. Some names/proper nouns that you want to reuse in response may be used as Helper Terms. Helper Terms can be used anywhere Vocab is used, and also directly in Units. The Helper Terms dockable window is shown in  FIG. 35  and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Row 
                 Row of buttons contains: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Add new Helper Term. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Edit Helper Term 
               
               
                   
                 with selected Helper Term loaded. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected Helper 
               
               
                   
                 Term from the project. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts and Units that use 
               
               
                   
                 selected Helper Term. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads Helper Terms 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                  Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display 
                 List of all Helper Terms defined in the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 project. 
               
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0319]    The Add New Helper Term and Edit Helper Term windows (see  FIG. 36 ) both contain the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Term field 
                 Helper Term name 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;OK&gt; 
                 Confirms creation or change of Helper Term 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without creating or 
               
               
                   
                   
                 editing Helper Term. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0320]    Building Blocks serve as a means to group related Vocab and Helper Terms and Concepts together. There are two types of Building Blocks: Standard and Phrase. 
         [0321]    Standard Building Blocks provide a useful means for associating terms or Concepts that are commonly though not always related to one another, specifically ambiguous Vocab, or words with multiple meanings based on context, such as “arm,” which can mean a part of the body or to ready a weapon. 
         [0322]    Phrase Building Blocks are used to group short patterns of Vocab and/or Helper Terms together in a particular order. When a phrase Building Block is used in an input pattern, that pattern will only trigger when an input is received that exactly matches the order, from top to bottom, that is listed in the Building Block. 
         [0323]    Building Blocks composed of Concepts are represented by a first type of icon, while those composed of Vocab Terms are represented by a second type of icon. Vocab and Helper Term Building Blocks can be used in Concept input patterns, while Concept Building Blocks can be used in Unit input patterns. 
         [0324]    Building Blocks can be nested. This means that Building Blocks can be used to make other Building Blocks. Building Blocks has a dockable window shown in  FIG. 37  and contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Row 
                  Contains the following buttons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens Building Block 
               
               
                   
                 Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Building Block 
               
               
                   
                 Editor with selected Building Block 
               
               
                   
                 loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected Building 
               
               
                   
                 Block. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts or Units in which the 
               
               
                   
                 selected Building Block appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads Building 
               
               
                   
                 Blocks display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                  Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display 
                 Lists Building Blocks and their constituent 
               
               
                   
                   
                 parts. 
               
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0325]    Building Block Editor ( FIG. 38 ) allows the user to create new standard and phrase Building Blocks, populate it with pre-existing Vocab, Helper Terms, and Concepts, and edit its contents. The Building Block Editor contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Building Block 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Name: Text field for Building 
               
               
                   
                 Block name. 
               
               
                   
                 Type: Choose type of building 
               
               
                   
                 block: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Standard 
               
               
                   
                 Phrase 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Button Row: Contains the following 
               
               
                   
                 buttons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds the Building 
               
               
                   
                 Block to the project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Name&gt;: Updates 
               
               
                   
                 changes to the name. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Shows all Concepts and Units 
               
               
                   
                 that use the Building Block. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Terms 
                 Contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: List of Vocab Terms, 
               
               
                   
                 Helper Terms, and/or Concepts in 
               
               
                   
                 the Building Block. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Name: Text field for Building 
               
               
                   
                 Block name. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove Component&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Deletes selected term from the 
               
               
                   
                 current Building Block. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Term&gt;: Edit selected 
               
               
                   
                 item in its own pop up 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Term 
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies&gt;: Shows 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies of selected 
               
               
                   
                 term in pop up window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Term In Main 
               
               
                   
                 Window&gt;: Display selected 
               
               
                   
                 term in its corresponding 
               
               
                   
                 dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Move Up/Down&gt;: Move term 
               
               
                   
                 up or down relative to the other 
               
               
                   
                 terms in the Building Block. 
               
               
                   
                 Only available for Building 
               
               
                   
                 Block phrases. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search 
                 Same as Search dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Managing Vocabulary 
       [0326]    This section describes how to create, edit, and delete Vocab Groups, Vocab Terms, Helper Terms, and Building Blocks. Creating a Vocab Group can be performed in the following way.
       1. In the Vocab dockable window, right click anywhere and select Add→New Vocab Group to open the Add New Vocab Group window ( FIG. 39 ).   2. In the Add New Vocab Group window, enter a name for the group in the Group field.   3. Select the appropriate cascade group from the Cascades Group drop-down menu. Note: for Vocab Groups, the selection should end in “vocab”. Most words will be found in the General_Vocabulary cascade.   4. Click the &lt;OK&gt; button to add the Vocab Group to the database OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to continue without adding the Vocab Group to the database.       
 
         [0331]    Because Vocab Groups are shared across projects that share the same database, deleting a Vocab Group from the database affects the functionality of all projects attached to it. For this reason, it is best to remove the group from the project rather than deleting it from the database. Note: Vocab Groups may only be removed if they have no dependencies. To remove a Vocab Group from a project, use the following procedure:
       1. In Vocab, right-click on the desired Vocab Group and select Remove From Application.   2. The group will disappear from the list.       
 
         [0334]    As noted above, it is generally not recommended to delete Vocab Groups. However, should it be necessary to delete a Vocab Group from the database altogether, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired Vocab Group and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired Vocab Group and select Delete.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the group OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.       
 
         [0337]    To create Vocab terms, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 40 :
       1. Right click on an empty portion of the Vocab dockable window and select Add→New Vocab Term OR click the &lt;Add&gt; button at the top of the window.   2. Select the Group to which the Vocab Term will belong from the drop-down menu.   3. Type the Natural Language form of the term.   4. Select Add Plural Forms and/or Add Possessive Forms if desired.   5. Click &lt;Add&gt; or press the &lt;enter&gt; key, which will generate the name for the term.   6. Click in the Synonym text field   7. Type the desired synonym and press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Add&gt; to add the synonym to the list.   8. Repeat steps 6-7 for each additional synonym.   9. Click the &lt;Close&gt; button when finished.       
 
         [0347]    Adding new synonyms can be accomplished as follows:
       1. Right click on an existing Vocab Term and select Add→Synonym, OR double-click on said existing Vocab Term OR highlight the desired Vocab Term and click           &lt;Edit&gt; to open the Vocab Editor window.   2. Click on the Synonyms text field.   3. Type the desired synonym and press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Add&gt;.   4. Repeat steps 2 &amp; 3 for each additional synonym you wish to add.   5. Click the &lt;Close&gt; button when finished.       
 
         [0353]    Editing a Vocab Term can take the form of adding or deleting synonyms, changing the title of the term, or changing the Vocab Group to which it belongs. To edit an existing Vocab Term use the following procedure:
       1. Open the Vocab Editor window either by right clicking the desired Vocab Term and selecting Edit OR double-clicking on said Vocab Term OR highlighting the Vocab Term and clicking the &lt;Add&gt; button.   2. Make any desired changes to the Natural Language field, Term field, or Group drop-down menu, and click the &lt;Edit Names or Vocab Group&gt; button.   3. Select a synonym from the Synonyms display. Make any changes as needed in the Synonyms field, and click &lt;Update&gt;.       
 
         [0357]    Editing a synonym in Vocab Editor uses the following procedure:
       1. Double click on the synonym you wish to edit.   2. Modify the text in the Synonym text field as desired.   3. Click &lt;Update&gt; to add the changes to the term OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to cancel the changes.   4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each synonym to be edited.   5. Click &lt;Close&gt; to close the window.       
 
         [0363]    To delete synonyms, use the following procedure:
       1. Double-click on the desired synonym in the Synonyms display list.   2. Click &lt;Delete&gt;.   3. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the synonym OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.   4. Repeat steps 1-3 for each synonym to be deleted.   5. Click &lt;Close&gt; to close the window.       
 
         [0369]    To remove a Vocab Term from a project:
       1. Right click on the Vocab Term in question and select Delete OR select the term and click &lt;Delete&gt;.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the term OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.       
 
         [0372]    To create a Helper Term, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 41 .
       1. In the Helper Terms dockable window, click the &lt;Add&gt; button, or right click in the window and select Add, either of which will open the Add New Helper Term window.   2. Type the desired term in the Term field   3. Click &lt;OK&gt; to save the term, or click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window and continue without adding the term.       
 
         [0376]    With respect to editing Helper Terms, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 42 .
       1. In Helper Terms, select the desired Helper Term and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR right-click on the desired Helper Term and select Edit, OR double-click on the desired Helper Term to open Edit Helper Term.   2. Make any changes desired to the text in the Term field.   3. Click &lt;OK&gt; to close the window and save the changes OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving the changes.       
 
         [0380]    With respect to deleting Helper Terms, use the following procedure:
       1. In Helper Terms, select the desired Helper Term.   2. Click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right click on the term and select Delete.   3. In the Confirm Delete box that appears, click &lt;OK&gt; to delete the file OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the box without deleting the term.       
 
         [0384]    With respect to creating, editing and deleting Building Blocks, consider the following in connection with  FIG. 43 . 
         [0385]    To create a Building Block, use the following procedure:
       1. In the Building Blocks dockable window, click the &lt;Add&gt; button OR right click anywhere in the window and select Add from the right click menu, either of which will open up the Building Block Editor window.   2. Type name for the Building Block in the Name field and click &lt;Add&gt; or press &lt;Enter&gt;.   3. Select a Standard or Phrase from the Type dropdown.   4. Drag and drop Vocab Terms, Helper Terms, or Building Blocks from the Vocab, Helper Terms, or Building Block dockable windows OR drag and drop Concepts from the Concepts dockable window OR manually type the a term into the text field at in the Search section of the Building Block Editor, press &lt;Search&gt;, and drag and drop the results into the Terms display. A Building Block may contain either vocabulary (Vocab and Helper Terms) or Concepts.   5. Click &lt;Close&gt; when done.       
 
         [0391]    To edit a Building Block, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired Building Block and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired Building Block OR right-click on the desired Building Block and select Edit to open Building Block Editor.   2. Add new components to the Building Block by using the steps described above or skip to step 3.   3. Remove the desired terms/Concepts or skip to step 4. a. Double-click on the desired term or Concept. b. Click &lt;Remove&gt;.   4. Click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [0396]    To delete a Building Block, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired Building Block in Building Blocks.   2. Click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click to open the right-click menu and select Delete.   3. In the Confirm Delete box, click &lt;OK&gt; to delete the Building Block OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the box without deleting the Building Block.       
 
       Concepts 
       [0400]    Concepts can serve as the middle step in the Vocab, Concept, and Unit process. It is an important step in the process that defines the meanings behind groups of words and phrases. This section details what a Concept is, as well as the processes involved in creating and editing Concepts. 
         [0401]    In the English language, groups of words and phrases can imply a particular meaning. This meaning could be a goal, as in the phrase, “tell me about”, or it can be an idea, such as “a refreshing drink”. A group of all the possible phrasings that can define a meaning is known as a Concept. These Concepts are then used to create input patterns for any number of Units later on. 
       The Basics of Concepts 
       [0402]    Concepts are composed of input patterns ofVocab Terms, Building Blocks, Wild Cards, and Helper Terms. A Concept is considered triggered (or “hit”) when it receives an input pattern that completely matches at least one of its patterns. 
       Concept Groups 
       [0403]    Concepts are organized into groups by subject matter. The placement of Concept Groups in a cascade determines load order, and whether they are “Best Match,” or “Match All.” If a Concept Group is in a cascade labeled “Best Match,” only the constituent Concept with the best matching input pattern is triggered. If, on the other hand, the Concept Group is in a cascade labeled “Match All,” any Concept in this cascade having an input pattern matching the user&#39;s input will trigger. 
       Material Concepts 
       [0404]    Knowledge Bases created by Active Lab can be used for many different things, even the use of functions not currently supported by the Lab. One of these uses is to help create Information Retrieval (IR) databases, which are used for other advance types of searching. 
         [0405]    For use with these IR searches, Active Lab has the functionality to mark a Concept as a Material Concept, which will have a specific functionality within the IR search. 
       Generic Concept 
       [0406]    For every Concept Group, one Concept can be marked as the Generic Concept. The Generic Concept will trigger any time any Concept triggers from that Concept Group. 
       Concepts Dockable Window 
       [0407]    The Concepts dockable window, as shown in  FIG. 44 , allows the user to view, create, and manage Concepts and Concept Groups using a simple drag-and-drop interface. Concepts contain the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following 
               
               
                   
                   
                 (along with their corresponding right-click menu 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selections): 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Creates new Concept. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Concepts with 
               
               
                   
                 selected Concept loaded for editing. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected Concept from 
               
               
                   
                 project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Units and Building Blocks in which 
               
               
                   
                  the selected Concept appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes display list 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                  Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Concepts 
                  Display lists all available Concepts in their 
               
               
                   
                   
                 respective groups thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (red icon) Match All Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Group 
               
               
                   
                  (blue icon) Best Match Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Concept 
               
               
                   
                  Material Concept 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0408]    Concepts also has two right-click menu options, as shown in  FIG. 45 : the first option comes from right-clicking a Concept Group, the second from right-clicking a Concept. The right-click menu options have the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Add 
                  →concept Group: opens Add New 
               
               
                   
                 Concept Group. 
               
               
                   
                 →concept: opens Concept Editor 
               
               
                   
                 tab, with Concept Group field set 
               
               
                   
                 to current Concept Group. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Cascade Print 
                 Changes the print status of all Concepts in 
               
               
                 Status To Concepts 
                 selected Concept Group to the print status of 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                 the Concept Group. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected Concept or Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Group. 
               
               
                 Edit (from Concept Group) 
                 Opens Edit Concept Group window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Edit (from Concept) 
                  →In Main Editor: opens Concept 
               
               
                   
                 in Concept Editor in main window. 
               
               
                   
                  →In Pop-Up: opens Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Editor in its own pop-up window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Generate Concept 
                 Generate FPML file for selected Concept 
               
               
                 Group FPML 
                 Group 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                   
               
               
                 Remove From Application 
                 Removes selected Concept Group from the 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                 current project. 
               
               
                 Set All Child 
                 Changes the status of all Concepts in 
               
               
                 Concepts Immaterial 
                 selected Concept Group to Not Material 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                   
               
               
                 Set All Child 
                 Changes the status of all Concepts in 
               
               
                 Concepts Material 
                 selected Concept Group to Material 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                   
               
               
                 Set/Clear 
                 Set or clear Concept as the Generic 
               
               
                 Generic Concept 
                 Concept for its Concept Group. 
               
               
                 Set Material/Not 
                 Toggle the status of Concept between 
               
               
                 Material (from Concept) 
                 Material and Not Material. 
               
               
                 Set Print Status 
                 Sets Print Status of selected item to: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Test 
               
               
                   
                  Production 
               
               
                   
                  InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Show Applications 
                 Shows all applications selected Concept 
               
               
                 (from Concept Group) 
                 Group is used in. 
               
               
                 Show Dependencies 
                 Opens Dependencies window and shows 
               
               
                 (from Concept) 
                 all dependencies of selected Concept. 
               
               
                 View File 
                 Opens FPML file of selected Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Group in Editor tab of the main window. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Concepts Editor Tab 
       [0409]    Concepts are comprised of two principle components: tests and patterns. Patterns are made up of Vocab Terms, Helper Terms, Building Blocks, and Wild Cards and determine what phrases trigger the Concept. Tests are ways to make sure that the Concept is working as intended.  FIG. 46  and the following table lists the components available at the top of the Concept Editor tab. (This does not include tabs within the Concept Editor, which are described later on.) 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Group 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Drop-down list: The name of the 
               
               
                   
                 group to which the Concept 
               
               
                   
                 will belong. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a new Unit to a 
               
               
                   
                 giVen group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Opens the 
               
               
                   
                 Show Dependencies 
               
               
                   
                 window, which displays all of the 
               
               
                   
                 components affected by the 
               
               
                   
                 Concept. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show in Main Tree&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Concept in Concept dockable 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Find in FPML File&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Concept file in Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Forward&gt; and &lt;Back&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between previously 
               
               
                   
                 opened Concepts. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Hide Narne Checkbox 
                 Check to not allow the Concept to be 
               
               
                   
                 passed out of its cascade. Default not 
               
               
                   
                 checked. 
               
               
                 Material Concept Checkbox 
                 Check to change status of the Concept 
               
               
                   
                 to Material. Default not checked. 
               
               
                 Name 
                 Text field: Shows the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 Concept. 
               
               
                 &lt;Create&gt; 
                 Creates the new Concept. 
               
               
                 &lt;Update&gt; 
                 Updates any changes to the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                 Print Status 
                 This dropdown contains the following 
               
               
                   
                 options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Advanced View&gt; selection 
                 Makes the Components. Match 
               
               
                   
                 Condition, Comments, and Response 
               
               
                   
                 blocks tabs visible. 
               
               
                 Tabs 
                 The default tabs of Concepts are Tests 
               
               
                   
                 and Patterns 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Tests Tab 
       [0410]    Tests allows the user to create and edit test questions. Test questions represent user inputs that should cause the Concept to trigger. When looking at the set of test questions, it is best to consider the ideas involved. Ideal test questions should represent complete user inputs. In this manner, each Concept can be tested to see how it interacts with other Concepts. Test questions serve as a useful guide for the creation of input patterns. The Tests tab, as shown in  FIG. 47 , found under Concepts functions in much the same way as the main Tests tab, though it focuses solely on the tests for the open Concept. Tests contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Run Tests&gt;: Runs tests to ensure that 
               
               
                   
                 Concept is triggered when 
               
               
                   
                 expected. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Clears information from 
               
               
                   
                 tests so that they may be run from 
               
               
                   
                 the beginning. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses test tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands test tree. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Edit Test Question&gt;: Allows user 
               
               
                   
                 to edit a selected test question from 
               
               
                   
                 the Test Questions box. Note: a test 
               
               
                   
                 question must be selected in order 
               
               
                   
                 for this button to function. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Test Question&gt;: Allows 
               
               
                   
                 user to delete a selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question from the Test Questions 
               
               
                   
                 display. Note: a test question must be 
               
               
                   
                 selected in order for this button to 
               
               
                   
                 function. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set Question Active/Inactive&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Toggles a questions status as either 
               
               
                   
                 active or inactive. Inactive questions 
               
               
                   
                 are not tested, and do not affect the 
               
               
                   
                 status of the Concept. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Debug Question&gt;: Opens Debug 
               
               
                   
                 tab and displays the processes that 
               
               
                   
                 led to the test&#39;s result. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Tests tab with all Concepts whose 
               
               
                   
                 input patterns include any item in 
               
               
                   
                 the selected Concept&#39;s input pattern, as 
               
               
                   
                 well as all Units using that Concept. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Test Questions 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: Displays all test question 
               
               
                   
                 inputs by the user, as well as their 
               
               
                   
                 test status. A green circle indicates that 
               
               
                   
                 the test succeeded; a yellow circle 
               
               
                   
                 indicates that the test has yet to be run 
               
               
                   
                 or is InActive; and a red circle indicates 
               
               
                   
                 that the test failed. 
               
               
                   
                 Text input field: Input test questions 
               
               
                   
                 here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds test question from 
               
               
                   
                 Test Questions field to the Test 
               
               
                   
                 Questions box. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Updates changes 
               
               
                   
                 made to selected test question in 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Test Questions field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected test question from 
               
               
                   
                  Test Questions box. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0411]    Tests also includes a right-click menu, as shown in  FIG. 48 , when you click on a test question and contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Edit 
                 Copies test question into Test Questions 
               
               
                   
                 field below. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected test question. 
               
               
                 Debug Question 
                 Opens Debugger in main window with 
               
               
                   
                 selected test question loaded. 
               
               
                 Copy Text 
                 Copies selected test into Windows 
               
               
                   
                 clipboard 
               
               
                 Set Question Active/Inactive 
                 Toggles selected test question between 
               
               
                   
                 Active and InActive status. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0412]    Patterns, as shown in FIG.  49 ,_allows the user to create and edit input patterns for the Concept and contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a blank pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes display and 
               
               
                   
                 collapse all pattern trees. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Allows user to edit pattern 
               
               
                   
                 name, position, and proximity/order 
               
               
                   
                 selections. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Tests tab with all Concepts whose 
               
               
                   
                 input patterns include any item in 
               
               
                   
                 the selected Concept&#39;s input pattern, 
               
               
                   
                 as well as all Units using that 
               
               
                   
                 Concept. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Patterns 
                 Displays all the patterns created for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Concept. Input patterns are represented 
               
               
                   
                   
                 thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Active input pattern 
               
               
                   
                 Inactive input pattern 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Edit Pattern 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Position: Allows user to select 
               
               
                   
                 where the pattern must be located in 
               
               
                   
                 the input in order to trigger the 
               
               
                   
                 Concept. There are four options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  AnyWhere 
               
               
                   
                 Beginning 
               
               
                   
                 End 
               
               
                   
                 Entire 
               
               
                   
                 Substitute 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Order Matters checkbox: When 
               
               
                   
                 selected, Vocab Terms in input 
               
               
                   
                 must be in the same order as 
               
               
                   
                 displayed in the pattern to trigger. 
               
               
                   
                 Default: selected. 
               
               
                   
                 Proximity Matters checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, the Vocab Terms in 
               
               
                   
                 the pattern must be adjacent in the 
               
               
                   
                 input in order to trigger. Default: 
               
               
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves changes made to 
               
               
                   
                 Position, and Order/Proximity 
               
               
                   
                 selections. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0413]    The tabs shown in  FIG. 50  are only available when &lt;Advanced View&gt; is selected. Advanced Tabs has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Tab 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Components 
                 This tab allows the user to add Variables, 
               
               
                   
                 Function Calls, AppCalls, and Record Lists to 
               
               
                   
                 the Concept. 
               
               
                 Match Condition 
                 This tab allows the user to create and edit 
               
               
                   
                 pre- and post-conditions. 
               
               
                 Comments 
                 This tab allows the user to leave comments 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the Concept. Note: Comments 
               
               
                   
                 do not in any way affect the functioning of the 
               
               
                   
                 software, as they are intended to allow the 
               
               
                   
                 user to comment on the thought processes and 
               
               
                   
                 reasoning that went into the designing of the 
               
               
                   
                 Concept. 
               
               
                 Response Blocks 
                 In this tab, the user may input response 
               
               
                   
                 blocks in conjunction with the Response 
               
               
                   
                 Blocks dockable window. For more 
               
               
                   
                 information. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0414]    As discussed earlier, the Concepts Builder function is accessed either by means of the Concepts Editor tab, or by right clicking in the Concepts dockable window. 
       Creating a New Concepts Group 
       [0415]    New Concept Groups are created using the following procedure in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 51 :
       1. Right click on a blank space in the Concepts dockable window and select Add→concept Group to open the Add New Concept Group window.   2. Enter the name of the new Concept Group in the Group field.   3. Choose a Print Status from the Print Status drop.   4. Select a Cascade Group from the Cascade Group drop-down menu.   5. Click &lt;OK&gt; to create the new Concept group OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without creating a new Concept Group.       
 
       Adding New Concepts 
       [0421]    New Concepts can be added using the following procedure in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 52 :
       1. Click &lt;Add&gt; in the Concepts dockable window OR right click on blank space in the Concepts dockable window and select Add→concept, which opens the Concept Editor tab, or Click &lt;Add&gt; in the Concept Editor tab of the main display.   2. Choose Concept Group from drop-down menu.   3. Enter the name of the Concept in the Name field   4. Click &lt;Create&gt;.       
 
       Adding Questions 
       [0426]    Once a Concept has been created, the user can add test questions on the Tests tab using the following procedure in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 53 :
       1. Type the question in the Test Question field. Note: For Concepts, test questions are often single words or short phrases; however there is no limit to the size of test question.   2. Click &lt;Add&gt; or press &lt;Enter&gt;   3. Repeat steps 1 &amp; 2 as often as desired.       
 
       Creating Patterns 
       [0430]    To add Vocab Terms to a Concept pattern, use the following procedure in connection with the user interface shown in  FIG. 54 :
       1. In the Patterns tab, click the &lt;Add&gt; button to generate a blank pattern.   2. Open the Vocab dockable window and select a Vocab Term.   3. Drag and drop the selected Vocab Term into the blank pattern.   4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as desired.   5. If needed, select Helper Terms and Building Blocks from the Helper Terms or Building Blocks dockable windows and drag and drop them into the pattern.   6. Drag and drop to edit the order of the input pattern.   7. Select &lt;Order Matters&gt; and/or &lt;Proximity Matters&gt; if desired.   8. Select Position from drop-down if desired.   9. Click &lt;Save&gt; if steps 7 or 8 have been followed.   10. Repeat steps 1-9 to create as many input patterns as desired.       
 
       Generating Files 
       [0441]    Once patterns for either Concepts or Units have been changed, it is necessary for the FPML files themselves to be generated. There are currently two options:
       &lt;Generate All FPML&gt;: This will generate all FPML files for the project.   &lt;Generate FPML (Change Only)&gt;: This will generate only the FPML files that have recently changed in the database.       
 
       Testing Patterns 
       [0444]    Once test questions and patterns have been added to the Concept, it is necessary to run a test to ensure correct patterns have been used.
       1. Click &lt;Run Tests&gt; in the Tests tab. The dialogue box in  FIG. 55  will only appear if changes have been made to the database (i.e.: a pattern has been changed):   2. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to generate FPML (Changes Only) and run test or Click &lt;No&gt; to not generate FPML. The dialogue box in  FIG. 56  will only appear if &lt;No&gt; was selected from the Generate Files dialogue box.   3. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to run tests, or click &lt;No&gt; to not run tests.       
 
         [0448]    When the test is completed, the results will show in the Test Questions display next to each question. As discussed above, a green circle indicates success, a yellow circle indicates the Concept was untested or has been marked as InActive, and a red circle indicates failure. 
       Editing Concepts 
       [0449]    Editing a Concept works as follows:
       1. Find the Concept in the Concepts dockable window.   2. Double click on the Concept, which will open it in the Concept Editor tab OR right click on the Concept and select Edit→In Main Editor or Edit→In Pop-Up.   3. Make any changes desired.       
 
       Deleting Concepts 
       [0453]    To delete a Concept, use the following procedure:
       1. In the Concepts dockable window, Select the Concept to be deleted and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right click on a Concept and select Delete.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the Concept and close the dialogue OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.       
 
       Removing Concept Groups 
       [0456]    Because Concept Groups are shared by every project that accesses a given database, they may only be removed from the given project using the following procedure:
       1. Right-click on the Concept Group to be removed and select Remove from the right-click menu.       
 
       Units 
       [0458]    Units are the primary form of response to user input. A response is what results from user input. Units ensure that the appropriate responses appear for the each user input. The response may be as simple as a plain text output, or as complex as a series of Application Calls (AppCalls) that trigger specific actions, or any combination thereof. When preparing a Unit, it is important to consider the kinds of questions to which it will respond. What are the key phrases or words that are likely to show up in questions that should trigger the Unit? 
         [0000]    What question is the Unit supposed to answer? The answers to these questions will influence the user&#39;s choice of Concepts and the structure of the patterns. 
         [0459]    In order to trigger the Unit, an input must match all the Concepts and Helper Terms in at least one of the input patterns of the Unit. It is often helpful to determine the Unit&#39;s response first, as that will in turn define which questions it will answer. 
         [0460]    Units are organized into sets called Situation Groups according to their subject matter. Like Concept Groups, Situation Groups are placed under cascades, except they are set to “Best Match.” The placement of these cascades in the load order is usually last, because the Unit cascade outputs the response. 
       The Units Dockable Window 
       [0461]    The Units dockable window, shown in  FIG. 57 , allows the user to view, create, and manage Units and Situation Groups through simple drag and drop functionality. You can also search for Units by name using the Search field. Units contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;, Add→Unit: Adds new 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;, Edit: Edits selected Situation or 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;, Delete: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Situation or Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: shows 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies and Web Links for 
               
               
                   
                 selected Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Units display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Approval Search 
                 Searches Content Management System for 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Units matching the Approval Status. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 Content Management System drop- 
               
               
                   
                 down: Choose content management 
               
               
                   
                 system assigned to current project. 
               
               
                   
                 Approval Status drop-down: 
               
               
                   
                 Chooses type of search. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Approved 
               
               
                   
                 Disapproved 
               
               
                   
                 Pending 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Units 
                 Display lists responses and Units in their 
               
               
                   
                   
                 respective Situation Groups as follows: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Situation Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Unit 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Unit Response 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0462]    Unit contains two right-click menus as shown in  FIG. 58 . One is accessed from the Situation Group, the other from the Unit. The right-click menus have the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Add 
                  →situation Group: opens Add 
               
               
                   
                 New Situation. 
               
               
                   
                 →unit: opens Unit Editor tab, 
               
               
                   
                 with Situation field set to current 
               
               
                   
                 Situation. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Cascade Print Status 
                 Changes the print status of all Units in 
               
               
                 To All Units 
                 selected Situation to the print status of the 
               
               
                 (from Situation) 
                 Situation. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected Concept or Concept 
               
               
                   
                 Group 
               
               
                 Edit (from Situation) 
                 Opens Edit Situation window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Edit (from Unit) 
                  →In Main Editor: opens Unit in 
               
               
                   
                  Unit Editor in main window. 
               
               
                   
                  →In Pop-Up Editor: opens Unit 
               
               
                   
                 Builder in its own pop-up window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Generate Situation 
                 Generate FPML file for selected Situation. 
               
               
                 FPML (from Situation) 
                   
               
               
                 Remove From 
                 Remove selected Situation Group from 
               
               
                 Application (from 
                 current project. Does not delete from database. 
               
               
                 Situation) 
                 The Situation Group can now be found in 
               
               
                   
                 Unused Items. 
               
               
                 Request 
                 Submits selected Unit to Web Approval 
               
               
                 Approval (from Unit) 
                 Tool. 
               
               
                 Set Print Status 
                 Sets Print Status of selected item to: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Test 
               
               
                   
                  Production 
               
               
                   
                  InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Show Applications 
                 Shows all applications in which selected 
               
               
                 (from Situation) 
                 Situation Group is used. 
               
               
                 Show Change Requests 
                 Opens Unit Requests window and shows 
               
               
                   
                 all change requests for selected Unit. 
               
               
                 Show Dependencies 
                 Opens Dependencies window and shows all 
               
               
                 (from Unit) 
                 dependencies of selected Unit. 
               
               
                 Submit Child Units For 
                 Submits all Units in Selected situation to 
               
               
                 Approval (from 
                 the Web Approval Tool. 
               
               
                 Situation) 
                   
               
               
                 View File 
                 Opens FPML file of selected Situation or 
               
               
                   
                 Unit in Editor tab of the main window. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       The Unit Editor Tab 
       [0463]    The Unit builder function can be accessed through Unit Editor as shown in  FIG. 59 , or by right clicking on blank space in Units dockable window and selecting Add→unit, or by double clicking on any Unit in Units dockable window. The Unit builder function has three main tabs: Tests, Patterns, and Response, as well as a set of advanced tabs. Unit Editor contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button Bar 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a new Unit to a given 
               
               
                   
                 group 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Opens the 
               
               
                   
                 Show Dependencies window, 
               
               
                   
                 which displays all of the components 
               
               
                   
                 affected by the Unit. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show In Main Tree&gt;: Highlights 
               
               
                   
                 Unit in Units dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Find In FPML File&gt; Opens FPML 
               
               
                   
                 file of current Unit in Editor tab. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Forward&gt; &amp; &lt;Back&gt;: Navigates 
               
               
                   
                 between previously opened Units. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;View Directives&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Directives dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Open Directive Editor&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Directive Builder with current Unit 
               
               
                   
                 loaded. 
               
               
                 Situation 
                  Drop-down list: Select the name of 
               
               
                   
                 the Situation Group to which the 
               
               
                   
                 Unit will belong. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Name 
                 This field contains the name of the Unit. 
               
               
                 &lt;Create&gt; 
                 Creates new Unit. 
               
               
                 &lt;Update&gt; 
                 Saves any changes to Situation, Name, and 
               
               
                   
                 Print Status fields. 
               
               
                 Print Status 
                 Change Print Status of Unit to the 
               
               
                   
                 following options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Advanced View&gt; 
                 Makes the Components, Match 
               
               
                 selection 
                 Condition, Comments, Response blocks, 
               
               
                   
                 Nested Units, and Text-To-Speech tabs 
               
               
                   
                 visible. Default: Not selected. 
               
               
                 Tabs 
                 The following default tabs are available 
               
               
                   
                 normally: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Tests: Allows user to manage test 
               
               
                   
                 questions for Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Patterns: Allows user to manage 
               
               
                   
                 input patterns for Unit. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0464]    Tests, as shown in  FIG. 60 , allows the user to create and edit test questions. Test questions represent user inputs that should cause the Unit to trigger. When looking at the set of test questions, it is best to consider the ideas involved. Ideal test questions should represent complete user inputs. In this manner, each Unit can be tested to see how it interacts with other Units. Test questions serve as a useful guide for the creation of input patterns. Tests contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Run Tests&gt;: Runs tests on the questions 
               
               
                   
                 input by the user for the Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Reload Tests&gt;: Reloads tests. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Test Question&gt;: Allows the user to edit 
               
               
                   
                 the selected test question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Allows the user to delete the 
               
               
                   
                 selected test question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set Question Active/Inactive&gt;: Toggles 
               
               
                   
                 active/inactive for a question. Default for all 
               
               
                   
                 questions is Active. When inactive, tests are not 
               
               
                   
                 performed on the question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Debug Question&gt;: Opens Debug tab, 
               
               
                   
                 allowing the user to view the response 
               
               
                   
                 generated in response to the question, and the 
               
               
                   
                 processes leading up to said response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens Tests tab 
               
               
                   
                 with all Concepts used in the Unit input 
               
               
                   
                 patterns, as well as all Units using those 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Test Questions 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: Displays all Test Questions input by the 
               
               
                   
                 user, as well as their test status. A green 
               
               
                   
                 circle indicates that the tests succeeded; a yellow 
               
               
                   
                 circle indicates that the test has yet to be run or is 
               
               
                   
                 InActive; and a red circle indicates that the test 
               
               
                   
                 failed. 
               
               
                   
                 Text Field: Type test questions here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds test questions to the 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Updates changes made to a 
               
               
                   
                 test question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes a selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0465]    The Tests tab also contains the right-click menu shown in  FIG. 61  and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected test question. 
               
               
                 Debug Question 
                 Opens Debugger tab with selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question loaded. 
               
               
                 Set Question 
                 Toggles selected test question between 
               
               
                 Active/InActive 
                 Active and InActive status 
               
               
                 Copy Text 
                 Copies selected test question into Windows 
               
               
                   
                 clipboard. 
               
               
                 View Unit Hit 
                 Opens Unit Builder window with the Unit the 
               
               
                   
                 test question responded with. Only available 
               
               
                   
                 when test question does not hit current Unit. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0466]    The Patterns tab, as shown in  FIG. 62 , in the Unit builder looks and functions similarly to the patterns tab found in the Concept builder. Input patterns may consist of Concepts, Building Blocks, Helper Terms, lex types, input files, and Variables. Patterns contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes changes to 
               
               
                   
                 patterns. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a blank pattern to the 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Allows user to edit the 
               
               
                   
                 name, Position, and 
               
               
                   
                 Order/Proximity settings of a 
               
               
                   
                 selected pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Tests tab with all Concepts used in 
               
               
                   
                 the Unit input patterns, as well as all 
               
               
                   
                 Units using those Concepts. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Ignore Items checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, Ignore Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 folders are visible. Any Concepts/file 
               
               
                   
                 dropped in these folders will not be 
               
               
                   
                 considered when that specific input 
               
               
                   
                 pattern is evaluated. Default: not 
               
               
                   
                 selected. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Patterns 
                 Displays all the patterns created for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Unit. Input patterns are represented thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                   
                 Active input pattern 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Inactive input pattern 
               
               
                   
                 Edit Pattern 
                 Edit Pattern Position: Drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                   
                 determines where the pattern 
               
               
                   
                   
                 must be located in input in order to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 trigger the Unit. Choose between 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Anywhere,” “Beginning,” “End,” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 “Entire,” or “Substitute.” 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Order Matters checkbox: When 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected, the pattern will only 
               
               
                   
                   
                 trigger if the order of the input 
               
               
                   
                   
                 matches the order of the pattern. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Default is selected. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Proximity Matters checkbox: When 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected, the pattern will only 
               
               
                   
                   
                 trigger if the inputs are adjacent to one 
               
               
                   
                   
                 another. Default is selected. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves changes to pattern name, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 location, and order/proximity 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selections. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Note: Order Matters and Proximity Matters 
               
               
                   
                 have no affect on Unit input patterns, except 
               
               
                   
                 for use with AppEvents. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0467]    The Patterns tab also has the following right-click menu shown in  FIG. 63  along with the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Edit 
                 Opens pattern in the Edit Pattern 
               
               
                   
                 display below. 
               
               
                 Delete 
                 Deletes selected pattern. 
               
               
                 Copy and Create New Pattern 
                 Creates an exact copy of selected 
               
               
                   
                 pattern and places it as the last pattern in 
               
               
                   
                 the display. 
               
               
                 Set Active/InActive 
                 Toggles selected pattern between 
               
               
                   
                 Active and InActive status. 
               
               
                 Show Item in Tree 
                 Highlights selected Concept in 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts dockable window. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0468]    Response Tab 
         [0469]    The response tab, as shown in  FIG. 64 , allows the user to determine the response the Unit gives when triggered. Responses may contain plain text, or FPML tags. This response may also include internet URLs and Web Links. Response contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Url 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Url&gt;: Opens Url Editor 
               
               
                   
                 with current Urlloaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;: Removes 
               
               
                   
                 Url from response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Tree&gt;: Shows current 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Url in Url dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens two new fields for the 
               
               
                   
                 purpose of creating a 
               
               
                   
                 new Url: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uri: New Url name field. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: New Url Label field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves new Url. Only available 
               
               
                   
                 through &lt;Add&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
               
               
                   
                 Uri: displays path for response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Label: displays label of Url for 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 Auto Navigate To URL 
               
               
                   
                 checkbox: When selected, the 
               
               
                   
                 Unit&#39;s triggered response 
               
               
                   
                 automatically redirects to the 
               
               
                   
                 selected URL. When not selected, 
               
               
                   
                 the URL will be displayed as a 
               
               
                   
                 message link below the response. 
               
               
                   
                 Drop-down list: list of all 
               
               
                   
                 available URLs for the 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Web Links 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Web Link&gt;: Opens Web 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Link window with selected web 
               
               
                   
                 link. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove Call To Web Link&gt; 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 removes selected Web Link 
               
               
                   
                 from response. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show Web Link In Main 
               
               
                   
                 Window&gt;: Highlights selected 
               
               
                   
                 Web Link in Web Links 
               
               
                   
                 dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Move Call Order Up&gt;: Moves 
               
               
                   
                 selected Web Link up in relation 
               
               
                   
                 to other Web Links. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Move Call Order Down&gt;: Moves 
               
               
                   
                 selected Web Link down 
               
               
                   
                 in relation to other Web Links. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response 
                 This field is where the response is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 entered. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves the settings for the response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Cancels all changes made to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0470]    The right click menu shown in  FIG. 65  is available from the Web Links display of the Response tab and has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Edit Web Link 
                 Opens selected Web Link in Web Link 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                 Edit Unit/Uri 
                 Opens selected Unit/Url in respective 
               
               
                   
                 Units/Uris editors. 
               
               
                 Remove Web Link Call 
                 Removes selected Web Link call from 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                 Show Web Link In Main 
                 Shows selected Web Link in Web Links 
               
               
                 Tree 
                 dockable window. 
               
               
                 Move Call Order Up 
                 Moves selected Web Link up in relation to 
               
               
                   
                 other Web Links. 
               
               
                 Move Call Order Down 
                 Moves selected Web Link down in relation 
               
               
                   
                 to other Web Links. 
               
               
                 Set Print Status 
                 Change print status of selected item to the 
               
               
                   
                 following options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0471]    One of the most powerful tools of ActiveAgent is the ability to direct a response to a particular web page. This is done by creating a Url in the Urls dockable window, shown in  FIG. 66 , then dragging it into the Response tab of the Unit Builder. The Urls dockable window contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new Url. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected Url. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected Url. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: shows 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies for selected Url. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Validate All Urls&gt;: Checks the 
               
               
                   
                 validity of all Urls. Invalid Urls 
               
               
                   
                 are displayed with an icon. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;View Url&gt;: Open selected Url in a 
               
               
                   
                 new web browser. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set Web Server&gt;: Opens Set 
               
               
                   
                 Web Server Path. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Uris 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward 
               
               
                   
                 Navigation&gt;: Navigates 
               
               
                   
                 between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Urls 
                  Display lists of all Urls in the project: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Url 
               
               
                   
                 WrongUrl 
               
               
                   
                 Unit that uses above Url. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Search Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0472]    Clicking the &lt;Add&gt; button or right-clicking→Add will open the Edit Url window shown in  FIG. 67 , which is used to both create and edit Urls. This window has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Label 
                 Text field containing the Active Lab 
               
               
                   
                   
                 display name for the Url. 
               
               
                   
                 Link Name 
                 Text field containing the name displayed by 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the Agent. 
               
               
                   
                 URI 
                 Text field containing the path for the Url 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;ViewUrl&gt; 
                 Opens Url in new web browser. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Save any changes to the Url, OR creates 
               
               
                   
                   
                 new Url. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0473]    Web Links 
         [0474]    Web Links allow the user to include links directly to other Units and/or Urls along with a response. Web Links are created and edited from the Web Links dockable window shown in  FIG. 68 . They can be added to any number of responses by dragging the Web Link from the Web Links dockable window to the Web Links field in the Response tab of the Unit Builder. 
         [0475]    The Web Links dockable window is separated into two folders: Links Containing Urls, and Links Containing Units. This is done for mainly organizational purposes. The Web Links dockable window contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new Web Link. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected Web Link. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected Web 
               
               
                   
                 Link. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Uris display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uris 
                 Display lists of all Uris in the project: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Folder 
               
               
                   
                 Web Link 
               
               
                   
                 Url 
               
               
                   
                 Unit 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                  Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0476]    Web Links are created and edited by selecting &lt;Add&gt; or by selecting right-click→Add to open the Web Links window, which is shown in  FIG. 69 . Web Links Editor has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Agent Link Name 
                 Text field containing the name displayed by the 
               
               
                   
                 Agent. 
               
               
                 Lab Display Name 
                 Text field containing the name displayed by 
               
               
                   
                 the Active Lab. 
               
               
                 Link Style Dropdown 
                 Choose between Standard and Default 
               
               
                 Navigation Type 
                 Dropdown chooses what type of link the 
               
               
                 Dropdown 
                 Web Link will use. There are three 
               
               
                   
                 options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Main Window: Url will appear in the 
               
               
                   
                 main web browser. 
               
               
                   
                 PopUp: Url will appear in its own web 
               
               
                   
                 browser window. 
               
               
                   
                 Go To Unit: Units response will be 
               
               
                   
                 displayed. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Linked Object 
                 Field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 An icon showing whether the Web 
               
               
                   
                 Link is one of the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Url 
               
               
                   
                 Unit 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 The name of the Url or Unit used by the 
               
               
                   
                 Web Link. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Save any changes to the Url, OR creates 
               
               
                   
                 new Url. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0477]    Advanced Tabs 
         [0478]    These tabs may only be viewed when &lt;Advanced View&gt; is selected. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Tab 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Components 
                 This tab displays the Variables, function 
               
               
                   
                   
                 calls, AppCalls, and Record Lists 
               
               
                   
                   
                 associated with the Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Match Condition 
                 This tab allows the user to create and 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edit pre- and post-conditions. 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
                 This tab allows the user to leave 
               
               
                   
                   
                 comments on the Unit. Note: Comments do 
               
               
                   
                   
                 not in any way affect the functioning of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 software, as they are intended to allow the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 user to comment 
               
               
                   
                   
                 on the thought processes and reasoning 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that went into the designing of the Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Response Blocks 
                 This tab allows the user to create 
               
               
                   
                   
                 response blocks in conjunction with the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Response Blocks dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 Text-To-Speech 
                 This tab allows the user to attach an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 individual Text-To-Speech file to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0479]    Response Blocks are responses shared by multiple Units in addition to the unique Unit-specific responses. Response Blocks can be manipulated via the Response Blocks dockable window, and the Response Blocks advanced tab found under the Units tab. 
         [0480]    The Text-To-Speech tab allows the user to manually attach a voice file to a Unit and has the following features: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Tab 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Current Status 
                 This display has the following components 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: Displays the name of the 
               
               
                   
                 Text-To-Speech file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt;: Opens a Browse 
               
               
                   
                 window to search for a Text-To- 
               
               
                   
                 Speech File. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove&gt;: Removes Text-To- Speech 
               
               
                   
                 file listed in the Text Field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Status 
                 Shows the progress and results of the file 
               
               
                   
                   
                 import. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0481]    The following discussion describes various ways to create, test, and edit Units. 
       Creating a New Situation 
       [0482]    To create a new situation, use the following procedure:
       1. In the Units dockable window, right click on a Unit or Situation and select Add→situation, which will open the Add New Situation window shown in  FIG. 70 .   2. In the Situation field, type the desired name of the Situation Group and hit &lt;Tab&gt; or &lt;Enter&gt;. The Counter Variable field will auto populate.   3. Edit the Counter Variable if desired. Note: Counter Variables can only be a single word.   4. Select a Print Status from the drop-down.   5. Select &lt;Required&gt; check box if desired, or skip to step 7.   6. Choose a Cascade Group from the drop-down menu.   7. Click &lt;OK&gt; to continue and save the changes OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close Add New Situation without creating a new situation.       
 
       Adding New Units 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             1. In Units, select a Situation Group and click &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click on a Situation Group and select Add→Unit from the menu to open the Units tab. 
             2. Select the Situation which the Unit will belong to from the drop-down menu. 
             3. Type in the Unit Name. 
             4. Click &lt;Create&gt;. 
           
         
       
     
         [0494]    Adding Questions 
         [0495]    Once the Unit has been created, test questions may be added under the Tests tab of the Unit Editor.
       1. Type the question in the Test Questions field.   2. Press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Add&gt; to add the test question to the Test Questions display.       
 
         [0498]    Adding Responses 
         [0499]    Each Unit has a response that occurs as a result of an input that matches any of its input patterns. As discussed above, this may be as simple as a single line of text or as complicated as an application action. 
         [0500]    Though responses do not require URLs to function, they can benefit from the versatility associated with web pages. To add a URL to a response:
       1. Open Uris dockable window.   2. Click and Drag selected Url from the Uris dockable window into the Uri display in the Response tab.   3. Select Auto-Navigate to URL if desired.       
 
         [0504]    To create the response itself:
       1. Type in the desired response in the Response field.   2. Click the &lt;Save&gt; button to save the response OR click the &lt;Cancel&gt; button to erase any changes made to the response.       
 
         [0507]    Web Links allows the user to add links to additional web pages and/or Units in the response. To add a Web Link to a response:
       1. Open Uris, Web Links, or Units dockable window.   2. Click and Drag selected Url, Web Link, or Unit from the dockable window into the Web Links display in the Response tab. Note: you may be prompted to create a Web Link at this point.   3. Use &lt;Move Call Order Up&gt; and &lt;Move Call Order Down&gt; as desired.       
 
         [0511]    Generating the Patterns 
         [0512]    In order to generate a pattern for a Unit, use the following procedure:
       1. In Patterns of Units, click &lt;Add&gt; to create a blank input pattern.   2. Drag and drop any desired Concepts from the Concepts dockable window into the blank pattern.   3. Drag and drop any desired Helper Terms from the Helper Terms dockable window into the pattern.   4. Arrange the Concepts and Helper Terms as desired.   5. Select &lt;Order Matters&gt; and/or &lt;Proximity Matters&gt; as desired. Note: no affect will be produced by this step unless AppEvents are used.   6. Choose a pattern position from the Edit Pattern       
 
         [0519]    Position drop-down menu.
       7. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save any changes.   8. Click &lt;Generate FPML (Changes Only) or &lt;Generate All Fpml&gt; or to enter the pattern into the database if desired.       
 
         [0522]    Use steps 1-7 to create as many patterns as desired. Note: You must double click on the pattern in order to later make any changes to the Position or &lt;Order Matters&gt; and &lt;Proximity Matters&gt; check boxes. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save these changes. 
         [0523]    Testing the Patterns 
         [0524]    In order to test the input patterns, use the following procedure similar to testing Concepts:
       1. Click &lt;Run Tests&gt; in the Tests tab.   2. The dialogue box in  FIG. 71  will only appear if changes have been made to the database (i.e.: a pattern has been changed):   3. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to generate FPML (Changes Only) and run test or Click &lt;No&gt; to not generate FPML. Note, select &lt;Yes&gt; if a pattern was changed.   4. The dialogue box in  FIG. 72  will only appear if &lt;No&gt; was selected from the Generate Files dialogue box.   5. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to run tests, or click &lt;No&gt; to not run tests.   6. The status of each test question is displayed as a colored ball next to the question. A green circle indicates success, a yellow ball indicates the question was not tested, and a red ball indicates failure. Questions that fail feature a brief summary of the error(s) encountered.       
 
         [0531]    To debug a failed question:
       1. Right click on the test question.   2. Select Debug Question. This loads the selected question into the debugger, and allows the user to see the processes that led to the question&#39;s failure.       
 
         [0534]    Editing a Unit 
         [0535]    To edit a unit, perform the following procedure:
       1. Double click on the Unit in the Units OR right click on the Unit and select Edit→In Main Editor or Edit→In Pop-Up Editor. Both methods have the same functionality.   2. Make any changes desired to Name, Situation, or Print Status then click the &lt;Update&gt;.   3. Make any changes to individual input patterns. a. Select an input pattern.
           b. If desired, drag and drop a new Concept into the input pattern.   c. If desired, select or de-select Order Matters.   d. If desired, select or de-select Proximity Matters.   e. If desired, select a Position.   f. Click &lt;Save&gt; to finalize the changes to the input pattern.   
           4. Make any changes to test questions.   5. Make any changes desired to the response.       
 
         [0546]    To delete a pattern, perform the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired input pattern and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the selected input pattern and select Delete.   2. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the pattern or &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting.       
 
         [0549]    To deactivate a pattern, perform the following procedure:
       1. Right-click on the desired pattern.   2. Select Set Active/Inactive from the right-click menu.       
 
         [0552]    In the same way that patterns may be deactivated, the same may be done to entire Units.
       1. In the main tab Tests, right-click the tests associated with the desired Unit.   2. Select Set Active/Inactive from the right-click menu.       
 
         [0555]    Test questions may be edited using the following procedure:
       1. Double-click on the desired test question to open it in the text field.   2. Make any desired changes to the text.   3. Click &lt;Update&gt;       
 
         [0559]    Responses may be edited using the following procedure:
       1. If desired, select a new URL by dragging it from the Urls dockable window.   2. Make any changes desired to the text.   3. Click &lt;Save&gt;       
 
         [0563]    Deleting a Unit 
         [0564]    To delete a unit, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired Unit in Units.   2. Right click on the Unit and select Delete.   3. In the Confirm Delete window that appears, click &lt;Yes&gt; to continue and delete the Unit OR select &lt;No&gt; to continue without deleting the Unit.       
 
       Directives 
       [0568]    Directives are the way conversation scenarios are created for ActiveAgent. They can take the form of a directed conversation, or a series of steps the user needs a person to follow. This section discusses in detail what directives are, along with the different windows that are associated with it, as well as how to implement them. 
         [0569]    Definition of a Directive 
         [0570]    A Directive can be thought of as a series of Units that are linked together by specific responses, forming conversations. These conversations can be triggered by events on a web page, or by a person&#39;s input to ActiveAgent. 
         [0571]    Take this simple example:
       Person: How are you?   ActiveAgent: I&#39;m fine, thanks! How are   Person: you? Good.   ActiveAgent: I&#39;m glad to hear that.       
 
         [0576]    In this example, there are actually two Units being triggered. The first is the response of “I&#39;m fine, thanks! How are you?” and the second Unit has the response “I&#39;m glad to hear that.” The work of the Directive is to make the second Unit only accessible directly after the first Unit has triggered. The reason for this is to prevent ActiveAgent from responding with “I&#39;m glad to hear that” anytime a person types is “Good.” 
         [0577]    A single Directive is not limited to one conversation stream; it can have many branches, based on the variety of things a person could say to the question of “How are you?”
       Person: How are you?   ActiveAgent: I&#39;m fine, thanks! How are you?   Person: Not so good.   ActiveAgent: I&#39;m sorry to hear that.       
 
         [0582]    In this example, the same Unit response was hit, of “I&#39;m fine, thanks! How are you?” but a different response is given. 
       Directive Trees 
       [0583]    Directives are displayed in a Directive Tree, which is a series of responses that can branch out as many times and with as much complexity as the user wants. 
         [0584]    In the following example, a single Unit, called the Parent Unit, is triggered. The conversation then flows into Child Units, or Units that can be accessed through Directives. 
         [0585]    Initial input: “I want to buy a watch”
       Unit 1 (Parent Unit)—“Great! Would you like a gold, silver, or diamond watch?”
           1. Response—“a diamond”
               a. Unit 2—“would you like a small, medium, or large diamond watch?”
                   i. Response—“small”    1. Unit 5—“To purchase a small diamond watch, please . . . ”   ii. Response—“medium”    1. Unit 6—“To purchase a medium diamond watch, please . . . ”   iii. Response—“large”    1. Unit 7—“To purchase a large diamond watch, please . . . ”   
                   
               2. Response—“a gold watch”
               b. Unit 3 “would you like a small, medium, or large gold watch?”
                   i. Response—“small”    1. Unit 8—“To purchase a small gold watch, please . . . ”   ii. Response—“medium”    1. Unit 9—“To purchase a medium gold watch, please . . . ”   iii. Response—“large”    1. Unit 10—“To purchase a large gold watch, please . . . ”   
                   
               3. Response—“a silver watch”
               c. Unit 4—“would you like a small, medium, or large silver watch?”
                   i. Response—“small”    1. Unit 11—“To purchase a small silver watch, please . . . ”   ii. Response—“medium”    1. Unit 12—“To purchase a medium silver watch, please . . . ”   iii. Response—“large”    1. Unit 13—“To purchase a large silver watch, please . . . ”   
                   
               
               
 
         [0602]    As seen in this example, specific responses to a Unit that is set up as a Directive will produce other Units. If a person typed “small” and wasn&#39;t in a Directive, no Unit would be triggered. However, if “small” is typed in response to a particular Unit, a specific Unit is triggered. In this manner, conversations can be directed. 
         [0603]    Another feature of Directives is that a Child Unit still has all the qualities of a regular Unit. This means that a Child Unit can also be accessed from outside the Directive. For example, Unit 3 from the above example can be set to always respond directly to the question, “Can I buy a gold watch?” even if its Parent Unit has never been triggered. Directive Dockable Window 
         [0604]    Since Directives are simply Units that have Child Units, the Directives dockable window, as shown in  FIG. 73 , looks very similar to the Units dockable window. The major difference is that the Directives dockable window will only show Parent Units (Units that have Child Units and that have no Parental Unit above them). The Directives Dockable window has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens Directive Builder 
               
               
                   
                  with empty directive. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Directive Builder 
               
               
                   
                  for selected Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: shows 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies of selected Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 Note: Currently Directives have no 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Directives 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Directives 
                  Display lists responses and Units in their 
               
               
                   
                   
                 respective Situation Groups as follows: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Situation Group 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Unit 
               
               
                   
                 Unprintable Unit 
               
               
                   
                 Empty Directive 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches for 
               
               
                   
                 specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0605]    Directive Builder 
         [0606]    Directives are created and edited in the Directive Builder window. This window consists of two main Tabs:
       Builder Tab: a quick easy way to create directive trees, and responses, and links.   Advanced Tab: a tree view of the entire directive, as well as testing and pattern building for Child Units.       
 
         [0609]    Builder Tab 
         [0610]    The Builder tab of the Directive Builder window, as shown in  FIG. 74 , is the easy place to create responses, add Urls and Web Links, and edit tests questions and has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Slide Show Display 
                  This display has the following components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Main Slide: displays expected User 
               
               
                   
                 Input and response of Parent Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Child Unit Slides: displays 
               
               
                   
                 response input for Child Units. 
               
               
                   
                 Click individual Child Unit Slide to 
               
               
                   
                 view Child Unit response and view 
               
               
                   
                 any additional Child Units of selected 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Right-Click menu: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Add Child: adds empty Child 
               
               
                   
                 Unit to Directive at current place in 
               
               
                   
                 Slide Show Display. 
               
               
                   
                 →Delete: deletes current Child 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Chat Window Display 
                 This display gives an editable view of the 
               
               
                   
                 selected Unit: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  User Input: displays expected User 
               
               
                   
                 Input. Click in this field to edit. 
               
               
                   
                 Response: displays Agent 
               
               
                   
                 Response. Click in this field to edit. 
               
               
                   
                 Web Links: displays Web Links for 
               
               
                   
                 current Unit. Drag Web Links 
               
               
                   
                 here to add to Unit Response. 
               
               
                   
                  Unused Answer Links: displays 
               
               
                   
                 Child Units that are not listed as 
               
               
                   
                 Web Links for that Unit. Drag to 
               
               
                   
                 Web Links above to add to Unit 
               
               
                   
                 Response. This window also contains 
               
               
                   
                 the following buttons. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Web Link&gt;: Opens Web 
               
               
                   
                 Link window with selected web 
               
               
                   
                 link. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove Call To Web Link&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 removes selected Web Link 
               
               
                   
                 from response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Web Link In Main 
               
               
                   
                 Window&gt;: Highlights selected 
               
               
                   
                  Web Link in Web Links 
               
               
                   
                 dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Move Call Order Up&gt;: Moves 
               
               
                   
                 selected Web Link up in relation 
               
               
                   
                 to other Web Links. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Move Call Order Down&gt;: Moves 
               
               
                   
                 selected Web Link down 
               
               
                   
                 in relation to other Web Links. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Browser 
                 Displays the website for the Url associated with 
               
               
                   
                 current Unit. 
               
               
                 Url Field 
                  This field is used to edit the Url for current 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 This field contains the following 
               
               
                   
                 components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Url&gt;: Opens Url Editor with 
               
               
                   
                 current Urlloaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;: Removes 
               
               
                   
                 Url from response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Tree&gt;: Highlights current 
               
               
                   
                 Url in Uri dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens two new fields for the 
               
               
                   
                 purpose of creating a new Url: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uri: New Url name field. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: New Url Label field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves new Url. Only 
               
               
                   
                 available through &lt;Add&gt; button. 
               
               
                   
                 Uri: displays Url for response. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: displays label ofUrl for 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 Auto Navigate To URL checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, the Unit&#39;s triggered 
               
               
                   
                 response. When not selected, the 
               
               
                   
                 URL will display as a message link. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0611]    Advanced Tab 
         [0612]    The Advanced tab of the Directive Builder window, as shown in  FIG. 75 , is where the directive tree can be directly accessed, where patterns and test questions can be added, and where test can be run. 
         [0613]    The Advanced tab contains three main sections:
       Directive field: the location of the Directive Tree   Edit→Info tab: use this tab to add or modify patterns, responses, test questions, Variables, and Urls.   Test tab: where all test questions can be run.       
 
         [0617]    The Directive Tree is a tree view of the entire Directive. Each indent on the tree implies one level further into the tree. Branches on the same level of the tree are linked together with vertical lines. 
         [0618]    To access many of the features of the Directives field, access the right click menu. The Directives field has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds empty User Input or 
               
               
                   
                 Response, based on which item is 
               
               
                   
                 currently selected in the Directive 
               
               
                   
                 Tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Unit Builder for 
               
               
                   
                 selected Unit or response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove&gt;: Removes selected item from 
               
               
                   
                 Directive Tree 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Directives 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Uris checkbox: Toggles display 
               
               
                   
                 ofUrls with responses in 
               
               
                   
                 Directive Tree. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Variables checkbox: Toggles 
               
               
                   
                 display of Variables with responses 
               
               
                   
                 in Directive Tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Directive 
                 The Directive Tree uses the following 
               
               
                 Tree 
                 Icons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Complete Directive Branch: Indicates a 
               
               
                   
                 branch of the Directive 
               
               
                   
                 Tree that has at least a name, a 
               
               
                   
                 response, and a user input. 
               
               
                   
                 Incomplete Directive Branch: Indicates 
               
               
                   
                 a branch of the directive 
               
               
                   
                 tree that has yet to be completed. 
               
               
                   
                 Directive Response: Displays 
               
               
                   
                 response for its corresponding 
               
               
                   
                 branch of the Directive Tree 
               
               
                   
                 Incomplete Directive Response: 
               
               
                   
                 Displays when no response exists 
               
               
                   
                 for the corresponding branch of the 
               
               
                   
                 Directive Tree. 
               
               
                   
                 Unprintable Unit: Displays when a directive is 
               
               
                   
                 incomplete due to missing user inputs, responses, 
               
               
                   
                 or patterns 
               
               
                   
                 Unit: Displays when Directive has all pieces 
               
               
                   
                 considered to make it complete. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Right-Click 
                 The Directive Tree uses the following right-click menu 
               
               
                 Menu 
                 options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Add Prompt/Agent Response: 
               
               
                   
                 Add response to a branch if none 
               
               
                   
                 exists. 
               
               
                   
                 Add User Input: Add a branch to the Directive Tree 
               
               
                   
                 under selected 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 Edit: Opens Unit Builder with selected Unit loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 Rename: Rename selected item 
               
               
                   
                 Remove: Removes selected branch 
               
               
                   
                 and all child branches underneath. 
               
               
                   
                 Edit Unit: Opens Unit Builder 
               
               
                   
                 with selected Unit loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 Create Unit: Opens Unit Builder 
               
               
                   
                 and creates new Unit from the 
               
               
                   
                 selected branch. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Unit In Tree: Highlights selected Unit in Units 
               
               
                   
                 dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 Copy Input/Response: Make a copy of selected branch. 
               
               
                   
                 Paste Input/Response: Pastes copied Input/Response 
               
               
                   
                 into selected branch. 
               
               
                   
                 Set Print Status: Sets Print Status of selected Unit to 
               
               
                   
                 the following options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Test 
               
               
                   
                 Production 
               
               
                   
                 InActive 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Cascade Print Status To 
               
               
                   
                 Children: Copies Print Status of 
               
               
                   
                 selected branch to all child branches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0619]    The Edit→Info tab, as shown in  FIG. 76 , allows changes to be made to individual branches of the Directive Tree. The use of this window is similar to the Unit Editor tab for adding test questions, editing responses, and adding patterns. 
         [0620]    Test questions and patterns listed under the Edits Tab are Directive specific. This means that they only apply within the Directive, and cannot be accessed unless the previous point in the Directive has been hit. The Edit Info tab has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 User Input 
                 The name of the branches displayed 
               
               
                 Display 
                 in the Directive Builder. 
               
               
                 Response 
                 The Response for the Unit is written 
               
               
                 Display 
                 here. 
               
               
                 Show As Link 
                 Check to show Directive Child as a 
               
               
                 checkbox 
                 Web Link. 
               
               
                 Link Name 
                 Displays the name of the Web Link 
               
               
                   
                 shown for the Unit. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 User Input 
                 This tab contains the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add New Match 
               
               
                   
                 Condition&gt;: Add test 
               
               
                   
                 question to the 
               
               
                   
                 Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Match Condition&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Edit selected test question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Match Condition&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Removes selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Directives 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 Show child user inputs 
               
               
                   
                 checkbox: Toggles display of 
               
               
                   
                 all 
               
               
                   
                 questions that are associated 
               
               
                   
                 with selected Unit from 
               
               
                   
                 outside the Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 Main window: displays all 
               
               
                   
                 directive specific test 
               
               
                   
                 questions 
               
               
                   
                 for selected Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Text field: Field for typing 
               
               
                   
                 new test questions. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Default User Input 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  checkbox: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 set selected test question as 
               
               
                   
                 Default (the name in User 
               
               
                   
                 Input Display field). 
               
               
                   
                 Add: Add test question. 
               
               
                   
                 Update: Saves changes to test 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 Delete: Deletes selected test question. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Additional 
                  This tab contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Patterns 
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes changes to patterns. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a blank pattern to the display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Allows user to edit the name, 
               
               
                   
                 position, and 
               
               
                   
                 order/proximity settings of a selected 
               
               
                   
                 pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Tests tab with all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts used in the Unit input patterns, as 
               
               
                   
                 well as all Units using those Concepts. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Ignore Items checkbox: When 
               
               
                   
                 selected, Ignore Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 folders are visible. Any Concepts/file 
               
               
                   
                 dropped in these folders will not be 
               
               
                   
                 considered when that specific input pattern 
               
               
                   
                 is evaluated. Default: not selected. 
               
               
                   
                 Show Child Patterns 
               
               
                   
                 Checkbox: Toggles display of 
               
               
                   
                 all patterns that are associated with selected 
               
               
                   
                 Unit from outside the Directive. 
               
               
                   
                 Patterns Main Window: all the patterns 
               
               
                   
                 created for the Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Input patterns are represented thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Active input pattern 
               
               
                   
                 Inactive input pattern 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Position: Drop-down list 
               
               
                   
                 determines where the pattern 
               
               
                   
                 must be located in input in order to trigger 
               
               
                   
                 the Unit. Choose between “Anywhere,” 
               
               
                   
                 “Beginning,” “End,” “Entire,” 
               
               
                   
                 or “Substitute.” 
               
               
                   
                 Order Matters checkbox: When selected, 
               
               
                   
                 Unit only 
               
               
                   
                 triggers on same order as input pattern. 
               
               
                   
                 Selected by default. 
               
               
                   
                 Proximity Matters checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, inputs must be 
               
               
                   
                 next to one another in order to trigger Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Selected by default. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves changes to pattern name, 
               
               
                   
                 location, and 
               
               
                   
                 order/proximity selections. Note: Order Matters 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 and Proximity Matters have no affect on Unit input 
               
               
                   
                 patterns, except for use with AppEvents 
               
               
                 Additional 
                 Variables listed in this tab will only 
               
               
                 Variables 
                 trigger within the Directive. This tab also contains the 
               
               
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edit selected Variable 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Removes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Variable. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Additional Variables tab. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Url 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Url&gt;: Opens Uri Editor 
               
               
                   
                 with current Urlloaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;: Removes Url 
               
               
                   
                 from response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Tree&gt;: Shows current 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Url in Uri dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens two new fields for the 
               
               
                   
                 purpose of creating a 
               
               
                   
                 new Url: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Uri: New Url name field. 
               
               
                   
                  Label: New Url Label field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves new Url. Only available 
               
               
                   
                 through &lt;Add&gt; 
               
               
                   
                 button. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Uri: displays Url for response. 
               
               
                   
                  Label: displays label ofUrl for 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Auto Navigate To URL checkbox: When selected, 
               
               
                   
                 the URL will display when the Unit is triggered. 
               
               
                   
                 When not selected, URL will display as a message 
               
               
                   
                 link below the response. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0621]    In the Tests tab, shown in  FIG. 77 , it is possible to test all the test questions for the Directive at the same time. For ease of use, the test questions are set up in a tree format that is identical to that found in the Directive Tree. When the tests are run, the results will show not just which test questions failed, but also in which branches of the Directive the test questions are failing. 
         [0622]    Except for the fact that the tests are in the form of a tree, the functionality of Tests is very similar to the Tests tab from the Unit Editor. The Tests Tab has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Run Tests&gt;: Runs tests on the questions 
               
               
                   
                 input by the user for the 
               
               
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Reload Tests&gt;: Reloads tests. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Test Question&gt;: Allows the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 user to edit the selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Test Question&gt;: Allows the user to 
               
               
                   
                 delete the selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set Question Active/Inactive&gt;: Toggles 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 active/inactive for a 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 question. Default for all questions is 
               
               
                   
                 Active. When inactive, tests are not 
               
               
                   
                 performed on the question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Debug Question&gt;: Opens Debug 
               
               
                   
                 tab, allowing the user to view the 
               
               
                   
                 output generated in response to the 
               
               
                   
                 question, and the processes leading up to 
               
               
                   
                 said output. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Test Potential Conflicts&gt;: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Tests tab with all Concepts used in 
               
               
                   
                 the Unit input patterns, as well as 
               
               
                   
                 all Units using those Concepts. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Test Questions 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: Displays all Test Questions 
               
               
                   
                 input by the user, as well as their 
               
               
                   
                 test status. A green circle indicates 
               
               
                   
                 that the tests succeeded; a yellow 
               
               
                   
                 circle indicates that the test has yet 
               
               
                   
                 to be run; and a red circle indicates 
               
               
                   
                 that the test failed. 
               
               
                   
                 Text Field: Type test questions here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds test questions 
               
               
                   
                 to the display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Updates changes 
               
               
                   
                 made to a test question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes a selected 
               
               
                   
                 test question. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Variables 
       [0623]    This section describes the creation and editing of Directives using the Directive Builder, and Directives dockable window. 
         [0624]    The Builder Tab 
         [0625]    When the Directive Builder opens, it will default to the Builder tab. The Parent Unit will be displayed in the upper left corner. From this window, both the Parent Unit and the Child Unit can be edited, and an entire Directive Tree can be easily built. The Builder tab creates an easy way to build a Directive Tree, however patterns and test questions are added using the Advanced tab discussed below. 
         [0626]    The left hand side of the Builder tab is a slide show view of the entire Directive. The uppermost slide will always be the Parent Unit of the entire Directive. Below it on smaller slides are all of the Child Units that are directly below it in the Directive Tree. 
         [0627]    If a Child Unit is selected, it will increase in size and any of its Child Units will appear in as small slides below it. This can be repeated as long as there are more Child Units below each subsequent Child Unit. 
         [0628]    Clicking on any Parent Unit will change the slide show view to show all Child Units of that Unit. 
         [0629]    A Directive can be created in a variety of ways from a variety of places. The reason for this is because a Directive is simply multiple Units linked together in a series. This makes creating Directives very flexible. 
         [0630]    There are three different ways to begin the process of creating a 
       Directive: 
       [0000]    
       
         
           
             From an existing Unit (either from the Unit Editor tab or Unit Builder window), click &lt;Open Directive Editor&gt; to open the Directive Builder. If the Unit is not already used in a Directive elsewhere, it will appear as the main Parent Unit in the Directive Builder. 
             From the Directives dockable window, click &lt;Add&gt; to open the Directive Builder. 
             From the Directives dockable window, right-click Add Directive to open the Directive Builder. 
           
         
       
     
         [0634]    When the Directive Builder opens, it will default to the Builder tab. The Parent Unit will be displayed in the upper left corner. All Child Units will be displayed below. 
         [0635]    To add a Child Unit: 
         [0636]    Right-click on the enlarged Child Unit and select→Add Child. 
         [0637]    To add a Child Unit to an existing Child Unit:
       1. Left click on desired Child Unit to bring it to the full size of a Parent Unit   2. Right-click on the desired Parent Unit and select→Add Child.       
 
         [0640]    To delete a Child Unit:
       Right-click on the desired Child Unit and select→Delete.       
 
         [0642]    Once a Parent Unit or Child Unit has been created its User Input display can be added or changed:
       1. Left Click on desired Parent Unit or Child Unit in the Slide Show Display.   2. Click in the field labeled User Input in the Chat Window display.   3. Type desired User Input.       
 
         [0646]    Once a Parent Unit or Child Unit has been created its Response can be added or changed:
       1. Left Click on desired Parent Unit or Child Unit in the Slide Show Display.   2. Click in the field labeled Response in the Chat Window display.   3. Type desired Response.       
 
         [0650]    Once a Parent Unit or Child Unit has been selected, its Web Links can be added and removed, and the order of the Web Links modified.
       1. Open Uris, Web Links, or Units dockable window.   2. Click and Drag selected Url, Web Link, or Unit from the dockable window into the Web Links display in the Response tab. Note: you may be prompted to create a Web Link at this point.   3. Use &lt;Move Call Order Up&gt; and &lt;Move Call Order Down&gt; as desired.       
 
         [0654]    Unused Answer Links, listed below Web Links, are the Child Units of the selected Unit. They can be added as Web Links to the Unit by clicking and dragging them from Unused Answer Links to the Web Links field. 
         [0655]    Web Links can be removed from the Unit by clicking the &lt;Remove&gt; button. 
         [0656]    Urls can be added and removed from the Unit response in a Directive using the same steps as a regular Unit.
       1. Open Uris dockable window.   2. Click and Drag selected Url from the Uris dockable window into the Uri display in the Response tab.   3. Select Auto-Navigate to URL if desired.       
 
         [0660]    The Advanced Tab 
         [0661]    When the Directive Builder window opens, it will default to the Builder tab, as shown in  FIG. 78 . Click Advanced to view the Advanced tab. 
         [0662]    The Advanced tab allows an entire directive to be built and maintained. It includes all the functionality of the Builder tab, just in a different form. It also has the ability to add test questions, add patterns, and actually test the Directive. This section describes the process. 
         [0663]    There are two ways to create a Parent Unit. Using Existing Units:
       1. Drag any existing Unit from the Units dockable window onto “Missing User Input” in the main Directive Tree window of the Directive Builder.   2. Click &lt;Yes&gt; when prompted to replace the node.       
 
         [0666]    To create a new Parent Unit from the Directive Builder:
       1. Right-click on the Missing User Input and select→Add Prompt/Agent Response. An unfinished response will appear below the Unit.   2. Type a name for the response in the Agent Response field and press &lt;Enter&gt;.   3. Type a user input that will display as the name of the Unit in the User Input Display on the it Info tab to the right.       
 
         [0670]    Once a Parent Unit is set in the Directive Tree, you can now add possible user responses. Each response will be considered a Child Unit, therefore only add one response per Child Unit desired. There are two ways to add a Child Unit: 
         [0671]    Note: These processes can be used on any branch of the Directive Tree to create Child Units for any branch. 
         [0672]    Using Existing Units:
       1. Drag any existing Unit from the Units dockable window onto the response of the Parent Unit. This becomes the new Child Unit.   2. Enter response in User Input Display in the Edit Info tab to the right.   3. Change the Response Display in Edit Info tab to the right if desired. This will also change the Unit&#39;s name in the Unit Editor as well.       
 
         [0676]    Creating a new Child Unit:
       1. Right-click on the response of the desired Parent Unit and select→Add User Input.   2. Type the response name in the Input Display in the Edit→Info tab to the right and press &lt;Enter&gt;.   3. Type a name for the Unit Response in the Response Display in the Edit Info tab to the right and press &lt;Enter&gt;.       
 
         [0680]    Units that are created in the Directive Builder do not technically exist until they are officially created. This is done by right-clicking on the selected Directive and selecting→Create Unit. The Unit Builder window will open. You may edit the Unit as necessary, or close the window. 
         [0681]    Once the Unit is created, it can be found in its corresponding Situation Group in the Units window, or by selecting→Edit Unit from the right-click menu. Patterns and test questions created from the Unit Editor can be accessed from outside the Directive, while patterns and test question created inside the Directive Builder will only operate when in the Directive. 
         [0682]    There are three ways to edit both the User Input Display and Response Display:
       Left click twice slowly on any input or response in the Directive Tree to open a text field to edit the item.   Right-click on any input or response in the Directive Tree and select→Rename to open a text field to edit the item.   With the Edit Info tab open, left-click on any input or response to make that Unit display on the Edit Info tab. The User Input Display and Response Display can now be directly edited.       
 
         [0686]    To delete any branch of the Directive Tree, including any Child Units of that branch:
       1. Select Unit to be deleted by left clicking on either the response or User Input.   2. Click &lt;Remove&gt; or right-click and select→Remove.   Note: Removing a Unit from the Directive Builder does not delete the Unit from the project if it has already been created.       
 
         [0690]    Adding Test Questions within a Directive 
         [0691]    To add test questions that will only apply within the Directive, follow these steps:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the User Input tab under the Edit Info tab.       
 
         [0694]    Type test question into the text field and press &lt;Enter&gt; or &lt;Add&gt;. Repeat this step as many times as desired. 
         [0695]    To add test questions that will only apply within the Directive, follow these steps:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the User Input tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Select Test question and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR double click on selected test question so it appears in the text field and click &lt;Delete&gt;. Repeat this step as desired.       
 
         [0699]    To edit test questions within a Directive, follow these steps:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the User Input tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Select Test question and click either &lt;Edit&gt; or double click on the test question. It will appear in the text field below.   4. Edit the test question in the text field.   5. Press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Update&gt;. Repeat steps 3-5 as many times as desired.       
 
         [0705]    Adding Patterns to Child Units 
         [0706]    Adding a pattern to a Child Unit within the Directive will limit that pattern to work only in the Directive. Adding these patterns is done in the exact same way as it is done in the Patterns tab of the Unit Editor.
       1. In Additional Patterns of Edit Info, click &lt;Add&gt; to create a blank input pattern.   2. Drag and drop any desired Concepts from the Concepts dockable window into the blank pattern.   3. Drag and drop any desired Helper Terms from the Helper Terms dockable window into the pattern.   4. Arrange the Concepts and Helper Terms as desired.   5. Select &lt;Order Matters&gt; and/or &lt;Proximity Matters&gt; as desired. Note: Currently, these options only affect AppEvents.   6. Choose a pattern position from the Edit Pattern Position drop-down menu.   7. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save any changes.   8. Use steps 1-7 to create as many patterns as desired. Note: You must double click on the pattern in order to later make any changes to the Position or &lt;Order Matters&gt; and &lt;Proximity Matters&gt; check boxes. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save these changes.   9. Click &lt;Generate FPML (Changes Only) or &lt;Generate All Fpml&gt; or to enter the pattern into the database if desired.       
 
         [0716]    To edit patterns within a directive, perform the following procedure:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the Additional Patterns tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Select pattern and click either           &lt;Edit&gt; or double click on the pattern. It will appear in the Edit Pattern field below.   4. Edit the pattern by either dragging and dropping new Concepts into the input pattern or deleting Concepts.   5. If desired, select or de-select Order Matters.   6. If desired, select or de-select Proximity Matters.   7. If desired, select a Position.   8. Click &lt;Save&gt; to finalize the changes to the input pattern if steps 5, 6 or 7 were followed.       
 
         [0725]    To delete patterns within a directive perform the following procedure:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the Additional Patterns tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Select the desired input pattern and click           &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the selected input pattern and select Delete.   4. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the pattern or &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting.       
 
         [0730]    To deactivate patterns within a directive, perform the following procedure. When set inactive, a pattern will not trigger the Unit when matched.
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the Additional Patterns tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Right-click on the desired pattern.   4. Select Set Active/Inactive from the right-click menu.       
 
         [0735]    Additional Variables within a Directive 
         [0736]    To add a Variable to a Directive, drag and drop any chosen Variable from the Components dockable window into the Additional Variables tab under Edit Info. 
         [0737]    Adding a Url within a Directive 
         [0738]    Though responses do not require URLs to function, they can benefit from the versatility associated with web pages. To add a URL to a response:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the Url tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Open Urls dockable window.   4. Click and Drag selected Url from the Urls dockable window into the Uri display in the Url tab.   5. Select Auto-Navigate to URL if desired.       
 
         [0744]    To remove a URL from a response:
       1. Select chosen Child Unit by left-clicking on it in the Directive Tree.   2. Select the Url tab under the Edit Info tab.   3. Select           &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;.       
 
         [0748]    Testing Directives 
         [0749]    To test only the test questions associated with the Directive, follow these steps:
       1. Select the Tests tab from the Advanced tab within the Directive Builder.   2. Click &lt;Run Tests&gt;. The dialogue box shown in  FIG. 79  will only appear if changes have been made to the database (i.e.: a pattern has been changed).   3. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to generate FPML (Changes Only) and run test or Click &lt;No&gt; to not generate FPML. The following dialogue box will only appear if &lt;No&gt; was selected from the Generate Files dialogue box.   4. Click &lt;Yes&gt; to run tests, or click &lt;No&gt; to not run tests in the box shown in  FIG. 80 .       
 
         [0754]    The status of each test question is displayed as a colored ball next to the question. A green circle indicates success, a yellow ball indicates the question was not tested, and a red ball indicates failure. Questions that fail feature a brief summary of the error(s) encountered. 
         [0755]    To debug a failed question:
       1. Right click on the test question.   2. Select Debug Question. This loads the selected question into the debugger, and allows the user to see the processes that led to the question&#39;s failure.       
 
       Variables 
       [0758]    Variables are means by which the KB may store information captured in a conversation for later use. This section discusses Variables and Record Lists as they fit into Units and Concepts. 
         [0759]    Components Dockable Window 
         [0760]    Variables and Record Lists are accessed via Components, along with AppCalls. The Components dockable window is shown in  FIG. 81  and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens Variable, 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Record 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 List, Function, and AppCall 
               
               
                   
                 Editors, depending on which 
               
               
                   
                 is currently highlighted. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Variable, 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Record 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 List, Function, and AppCall 
               
               
                   
                 Editors, depending on which 
               
               
                   
                 is currently highlighted. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 item. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: shows 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies and web links for 
               
               
                   
                 selected Unit. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Components 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens a copy 
               
               
                   
                 of the current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt;: Collapses 
               
               
                   
                 entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt;: Expands entire 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigate between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Components display 
                 Shows all available Variable Types, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variables, and Record Lists thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Variable type 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Variable 
               
               
                   
                 Variable that is saved in 
               
               
                   
                 Chat Logs 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Record List 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades 
               
               
                   
                 for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0761]    The above components only apply to Variables and Record Lists. 
         [0762]    Variables 
         [0763]    Variables are components used for profiling and contextualization. When used for profiling, they log a site user&#39;s activities on the user&#39;s site, and any information they might divulge, such as name, IP address, e-mail address, or credit card number. 
         [0764]    Variables are means by which a user may allow certain Units to trigger only in specific situations. Much like Directives, they allow for greater specificity in a Unit&#39;s functioning. The user may specify the type of Variable, the Variable&#39;s name, and the Variable&#39;s initialization value (be it true/false, empty string, or other value). Furthermore, the user may specify whether Variable information is saved in the chat logs. Note: If the Save In Chat Logs selection is not checked, all information gained from the Variable will be lost when the site-user leaves the chat. Save In Chat must be selected to view the information at a later time. 
         [0765]    Variables are grouped together by type. This is done mostly for organizational purposes. There are three categories of Variables:
       System Variables: System Variables are set by the Context IQ Engine.   Application Variables: Application Variables are set by the parent application.   User-defined Variables: These variables can represent a single value, an array, or a Record List.       
 
         [0769]    By clicking on Variables, and selecting &lt;Add&gt; or selecting a Variable Type and selecting &lt;Edit&gt;, the Variable Type window shown in  FIG. 82  will appear. Variable Type includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Name of the Variable Type. 
               
               
                   
                 Make Public checkbox 
                 Makes Variable publicly available if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 selected. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves changes made. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving changes 
               
               
                   
                   
                 made. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0770]    Variable Editor, shown in  FIG. 83 , allows the user to create and edit specific Variables and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Variable Type drop-down/ 
                 Select type from list. 
               
               
                 field 
                   
               
               
                 Name 
                 Name of the Variable. 
               
               
                 Initialization Value 
                 The value of the Variable at the start of 
               
               
                   
                 every session. There are three options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Do Not Initialize: If 
               
               
                   
                 selected, Variable will not 
               
               
                   
                 initialize. 
               
               
                   
                 Clear When Initializing: 
               
               
                   
                 If selected, value = “.” 
               
               
                   
                 Set Initialize Value: Variable is 
               
               
                   
                 set to the entered initialization 
               
               
                   
                 Variable. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Setup Action 
                 The action selected in this field will be 
               
               
                   
                 performed prior to the processing of each 
               
               
                   
                 input. There are four options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 None: Nothing is done. 
               
               
                   
                 Clear: Value of Variable is cleared. 
               
               
                   
                 Set Initialize Value: Variable is set 
               
               
                   
                 to the entered initialization 
               
               
                   
                 Variable. 
               
               
                   
                 Increment by one: value of 
               
               
                   
                 Variable will increase by one. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Save In Chat Logs checkbox 
                 If selected, chat logs record usage of 
               
               
                   
                 Variable in question. 
               
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves changes made to Variable. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving changes. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0771]    View Variable Initialization and Setup 
         [0772]    Selecting→Admin→View Variable Initialization And Setup will open the Variables window. The Variables window is a list of all Variables associated with the project, as well as what value the Variables are set to at either initialization or setup (before each User Input). 
         [0773]    The Variables window, shown in  FIG. 84 , is broken up into four distinct columns:
       Variable: This column displays the name of the Variable.   Initialization Action: This column displays what is done to the Variable at the beginning of each session. A Variable can be set to a value, cleared, or not initialized at all.   Initialization Value: This column displays the value the Variable is set to at either initialization or setup.   Setup Action: This column displays what action is taken before every user input.       
 
         [0778]    The Variables window also contains the following right-click menu: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Edit Name 
                 Opens field to edit the name of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Variable. 
               
               
                   
                 Edit Initialization 
                 Opens drop-down to change 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Initialization Action. 
               
               
                   
                 Edit Value 
                 Opens field to edit Initialization Value 
               
               
                   
                 Edit Setup Action 
                 Opens drop-down to change Setup 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Action field. 
               
               
                   
                 Open In Editor 
                 Opens selected item in Variable Editor. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0779]    Record Lists 
         [0780]    Record Lists are lists of Variables that work in conjunction with one another. They are used when information should be grouped together and when an unspecified number of values is possible. 
         [0781]    The Record List Editor, shown in  FIG. 85 , allows the user to specify the name of the Record List, the index Variable name, and the required parameters and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Main 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Name: Input field for the name of 
               
               
                   
                 the Record List. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves Record List 
               
               
                   
                 to the project. This button 
               
               
                   
                 must be clicked in order to 
               
               
                   
                 add parameters. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Index Variable Name: Text input 
               
               
                   
                 field for name of index Variable. 
               
               
                   
                 Clear on Initialization 
               
               
                   
                 checkbox: When selected, clears 
               
               
                   
                 Record List once initialized. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Required Parameters 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Required Parameter&gt;: Allows 
               
               
                   
                 user to edit selected required 
               
               
                   
                 parameter in Required Parameters 
               
               
                   
                 field. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Required Parameter&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Deletes selected required parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 Display: Lists all required 
               
               
                   
                 parameters. 
               
               
                   
                 Text input field: Required 
               
               
                   
                 parameters typed here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds field input to 
               
               
                   
                 display list, saves parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Updates changes 
               
               
                   
                 made to selected desired 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 required parameter. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0782]    Record List configuration appears whenever a Record List is added to a Concept, Unit; or Response Block. The Configure Record List window, shown in  FIG. 86 , will open automatically and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Parameter display list 
                 List of available parameters 
               
               
                 Parameter display 
                 Selected parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Select Parameter Value 
                 Choose between the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type&gt; radio selection 
                 &lt;Select from a Variable&gt;: Assigns 
               
               
                   
                 parameter value from a Variable 
               
               
                   
                 already assigned. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Select from a Record List&gt;: Pulls 
               
               
                   
                 value from another Record List. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Type in a value&gt;: Specific typed 
               
               
                   
                 input. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set from pattern&gt;: Select one of 
               
               
                   
                 the following values to assign to the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Wild card 
               
               
                   
                 Input File 
               
               
                   
                 Lex Type 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Value field/drop-down 
                 Value to assign to current parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Back&gt; 
                 Navigates to previous parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Next&gt; 
                 Navigates to next parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Finish&gt; 
                 Closes window with changes saved. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving changes. 
               
               
                 Select A Value 
                 Appears when no value is selected. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0783]    The following section discusses the procedures involved in creating, maintaining, and using Variables and Record Lists. 
         [0784]    Managing Variables and Record Lists 
         [0785]    This sub-section deals with creating, editing and deleting Variables and Record Lists. These operations are performed via Components. To create variable types, perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 87 :
       1. Select “Variables” and click           &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click on “Variables” and select Add.   2. In Variable Type, type in a Name for the Variable Type   3. If desired select the Make Public check box.   4. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save the Variable Type OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving.       
 
         [0790]    To edit an existing variable type:
       1. Select the desired Variable Type in Components and click           &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired Variable Type OR right-click on the desired Variable Type and select Edit from the right-click menu.   2. In Variable Type, make any changes to Name or Make Public.   3. When finished, click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save changes, OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving changes.       
 
         [0794]    To create variables perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 88 :
       1. In Components, select a Variable Type and click &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click on a Variable Type and select Add from the right-click menu.   2. In Variable Editor, select Variable Type from the drop-down-list. Defaults to the Variable Type you were on when you clicked &lt;Add&gt;.   3. Select a Variable Type from the dropdown   4. Type in a Name for the Variable.   5. Select an Initialization Value from one of the radio buttons.
           a. If &lt;Set Initialize Value&gt; is selected, enter a value in the appropriate field.   
           6. Select a Setup Action from one of the radio buttons.   7. If desired, select Save in Chat Logs. Default is unchecked.   8. Click &lt;Save&gt; to save the Variable and close the window OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving the Variable       
 
         [0804]    To edit variables, perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 89 :
       1. In Components, select the desired Variable and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired Variable OR right-click on the desired Variable and select Edit from the right-click menu.   2. In Variable Editor, make any changes to Variable Type, Name, Initialization Value, Setup Action, or Save in Chat Logs as needed.   3. Click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save all changes made OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving changes.       
 
         [0808]    To delete variables:
       1. In Components, select the desired Variable and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired Variable and select Delete from the right-click menu.   2. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the Variable OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting the Variable.       
 
         [0811]    To creating record lists, perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 90 :
       1. In Components, select “Record Lists” and click”” &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click on “Record Lists” and select Add.   2. In Record List Editor, type in a Name.   3. Type in an Index Variable Name. Note: This must be different from the name of the Record List. A common means of doing this while making the association between the index Variable and Record List clear is to simply type the name of the Record List, followed immediately by “index” Thus, the index Variable for Record List “state” would be “stateindex”   4. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   5. If desired, select Clear on Initialization. If selected, this will set Record List name to“.” and set index to “O”.   6. Type a desired required parameter in Required Parameters input field.   7. Click &lt;Add&gt;.   8. Repeat steps 6 &amp; 7 as often as desired.   9. When finished, click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [0821]    To edit record lists, perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 91 
       1. In Components, select the desired Record List and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired Record List OR right-click on the desired Record List and select Edit.   2. In Record List Editor, make any changes to Name or Index Variable Name desired.   3. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   4. To edit a required parameter:
           a. Select the desired required parameter.   b. Make any changes in the Required Parameters field.   c. Click &lt;Update&gt; to make the changes, or click &lt;Delete&gt; to remove the required parameter.   
           5. When finished, click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [0830]    To deleting record lists, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Components, select the desired Record List and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the Record List and select Delete from the right-click menu.   2. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the Record List from the project OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting.       
 
         [0833]    Using Variables and Record Lists 
         [0834]    When Variables and Record Lists are placed in a Concept or Unit, they are assigned a value. This sub-section concerns the assigning of value for Variables and Record Lists. 
         [0835]    To set variables in concepts and units, perform the following procedure:
       1. Open the desired Unit or Concept in the appropriate tab.   2. Select Advanced View.   3. Open Components as shown in  FIG. 92 .   4. Drag the desired Variable from Components to the tab.   5. In Variable Value Editor, as shown in  FIG. 93 , type in the desired value in the Set Value To field. This value will henceforth be available for all other Variables in the drop-down list.   6. When finished, click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save the Variable OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving the Variable.   7.       
 
         [0843]    To remove variables from concepts and units, perform the following procedure:
       1. Open the Concept or Unit in question in the appropriate tab.   2. Select Advanced Tabs   3. Open Components.   4. Select the Variable in question and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the Variable in question and select Delete from the right-click menu.   5. In Confirm Remove Variable, click &lt;Yes&gt; to remove the Variable from the Concept or Unit OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without removing the Variable.       
 
         [0849]    To set record lists in concepts and units, perform the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 94 :
       1. Open the Concept or Unit in the appropriate tab.   2. Select Advanced View.   3. Open Components.   4. Drag and drop the desired Record List from Components into Components.   5. In Configure Record List, select the Parameter Value Type from the radio buttons for each parameter.   6. Select a Value from the drop-down list.   7. Click &lt;Next&gt;.   8. Repeat steps 5-7 for each parameter.   9. When finished, click &lt;Finish&gt; to close the window and add the Record List to the Concept or Unit OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without setting values for the Record List.       
 
         [0859]    To removing a record list from a concept or unit, perform the following procedure:
       1. Open the Concept or Unit in the appropriate tab.   2. Select Advanced View.   3. Open Components.   4. Select the Record List in question and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the Record List and select Delete from the right-click menu.   5. In Confirm Remove Record List, click &lt;Yes&gt; to remove the Record List from the Concept or Unit OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without removing the Record List.       
 
       Advanced Vocabulary 
       [0865]    Advanced vocabulary refers to items that may be used to add greater flexibility to Concepts and Units, as well as discern the differences between various types of inputs. This section describes Variables, lex types, Wild Cards, and input files. 
         [0866]    Lex Types 
         [0867]    Lex types classify user inputs to further specify what is to be matched. Lex types function as placeholders that determine the type of input that is recognized. For instance, lex types are used to differentiate between numerical inputs and word inputs, or between units of weight and units of distance. 
         [0868]    Lex Types includes a dockable window, shown in  FIG. 95 , which provides the user with a means by which lex types may be created, edited, and deleted. Lex Types contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button bar 
                  The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds a new lex type. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Lex Builder with 
               
               
                   
                 selected lex type loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected lex type. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts in which the selected lex 
               
               
                   
                 type appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads the Lex Types 
               
               
                   
                 display list. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens a copy of the 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Lex Types 
                 Displays available lex types, represented 
               
               
                   
                   
                 thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Lex type 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                  This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades 
               
               
                   
                 for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0869]    Lex files are static files that are edited manually using a text editor or the Editor tab. They may be added to a project through the lab by means of a Lex Builder component. A Lex Builder window is shown in  FIG. 96  and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Input field for lex type name 
               
               
                   
                 Display Name 
                 Input field for display name of lex type. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves lex type to project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving lex type to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 project. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0870]    Wild Cards are place-holders that allow the user to create more flexible input patterns for Concepts. A Wild Card is placed between two Vocab Terms to indicate that there may be any words in between the Vocab Terms. There are three Wild Cards, and they are applicable to all projects:
       Match Any: this Wild Card can hold the place of zero or more words.   Match One: This wildcard holds the place of one and only one unspecified word in a pattern.   Match One or More: This Wild Card holds the place of one or more words.       
 
         [0874]    Wild cards includes a dockable window shown in  FIG. 97  and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new Wild 
               
               
                   
                 Card. Note: While it is 
               
               
                   
                 theoretically possible to add 
               
               
                   
                 a new Wild Card, the 
               
               
                   
                 existing ones are all that are 
               
               
                   
                 needed. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected Wild 
               
               
                   
                 Card. Note: Do not do this 
               
               
                   
                 without consultation of 
               
               
                   
                 development team. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Wild Card. Note: Do not do 
               
               
                   
                 this without consultation of 
               
               
                   
                 development team. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies are not 
               
               
                   
                 supported for Wild Cards. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Reload&gt;: Refreshes Wild 
               
               
                   
                 Cards display. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward 
               
               
                   
                 Navigation&gt;: Navigates 
               
               
                   
                 between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Wild Cards 
                 Displays all available Wild Cards, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 which are indicated thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Wild Card 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0875]    The Wild Card Builder, shown in  FIG. 98 , allows the user to create and edit a Wild Card&#39;s settings and has the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Wild Card name 
               
               
                   
                 Output 
                 The symbol used to indicate Wild 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Cards presence in match data. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Match All: [*] 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Match One or More: [+] 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Match One: [.] 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves Wild Card. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving Wild 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Card. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0876]    Input Files are lists of words in a text file (*.txt). They are used as substitutes for large groups of words, such as names and locations. An Input File can be placed in the pattern for a Concept just like a single Vocab Term. The pattern for the Concept will then trigger if any word in the Input File is hit, much like a Building Block. 
         [0877]    Once an Input File has been created, it can be compared against all Vocab in the KB. Any overlapping words are converted to Vocab in the Input File. In this way, common misspellings can be included if a word has already been assigned to a Vocab Term. Input files are accessed via a dockable window of the same name, illustrated in  FIG. 99  and having the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new input file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Input File Builder 
               
               
                   
                 with selected input file open. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected input 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts in which the selected 
               
               
                   
                 input file appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Input Files 
               
               
                   
                 display 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Files 
                 Displays all available input files for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 project thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input File 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0878]    Input File Builder, shown in  FIG. 100 , is used to create and edit input files. Each word or phrase should be on its own line of the text file. Input File Builder has the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 File Narne 
                 Text input field for the file name. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt;: Allows user to browse 
               
               
                   
                 for existing text file. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Display Name 
                 Name as it appears in the Active Lab. 
               
               
                 Print As Vocab checkbox 
                 Check to enable contents of the Input File 
               
               
                   
                 to be generated as Vocab. 
               
               
                 Input File tab 
                 Enter words and phrases here. One per 
               
               
                   
                 line. 
               
               
                 Vocab Output tab 
                 Input File is converted to existing Vocab 
               
               
                   
                 here. This tab contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Create Vocab Output&gt;: replaces 
               
               
                   
                 entries with Vocab Terms if they 
               
               
                   
                 exist and displays the results in the 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Output field. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Output&gt;: Opens Browse 
               
               
                   
                 window to save the Vocab output. 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Results display: shows the 
               
               
                   
                 Input File contents after &lt;Create 
               
               
                   
                 Vocab Output&gt; has been pressed. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field is used to: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Allows user to search for specific 
               
               
                   
                 text in the input file tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves input file. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes Input File Builder without saving 
               
               
                   
                 additions. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0879]    The next section deals with the procedures involved in managing lex types and input files. As mentioned above, lex types are created as part of the overall lex file, which is created manually by the administrator. 
         [0880]    To add a lex type to a project, use the following procedure. Note that corresponding FPML must be manually entered into the static file *.lex before this will have any affect.
       In Lex Types, click &lt;Add&gt; OR right click anywhere in the window to open a right-click menu and select Add.   In the Name field ( FIG. 101 ), input the name of the desired lex type.   Type the desired Display Name in the appropriate field. While this name may be any name, it would be best to stick to a name that accurately represents the lex type&#39;s function.   Click &lt;Save&gt; to close Lex Builder and add the lex type to the project OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without adding the lex type to the project.       
 
         [0885]    To edit lex types, use the following procedure in connection with  FIG. 102 :
       1. In Lex Types, double-click on the desired lex type OR select the desired lex type and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR right-click on the desired item to open a right-click menu and select Edit.   2. Make any changes desired to the Name and/or Display Name fields.   3. Click &lt;Save&gt; to close the window and save changes OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving.       
 
         [0889]    Lex types may be added to the input patterns of Concepts just like any other form of vocabulary. To do so, use the following procedure:
       1. Open the desired Concept in Concept Editor.   2. Select Patterns.   3. Create an input pattern OR open a previously existing input pattern.   4. In Lex Types, drag the desired lex type into the desired pattern.   5. Make any desired changes to Position, Order and Proximity.   6. Click &lt;Save&gt;.       
 
         [0896]    To delete a lex type from a project, use the following procedure:
       1. In Lex Types, select the desired file and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired file to open a right-click menu and select Delete.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;OK&gt; to delete the file OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting the lex type.       
 
         [0899]    Managing Wild Cards 
         [0900]    This sub-section deals with creating, editing, and adding Wild Cards to Concepts. 
         [0901]    In one or more embodiments, Wild Cards are created by the administrator only. To add a Wild Card to a Concept input pattern, use the following procedure:
       1. In the Wild Cards dockable window, click and drag the desired Wild Card into an input pattern in the Concepts Patterns tab.   2. Change the order of the input pattern as desired.   3. Make any changes to Position, Order, and Proximity selections as desired.   4. Click &lt;Save&gt;       
 
         [0906]    Input files are manipulated primarily through Input Files. This sub-section outlines the procedures involved in creating, editing, and deleting input files. 
         [0907]    Creating Input Files
       1. In Input Files, click &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click in the window and select Add from the right-click menu.   2. In Input File Builder ( FIG. 103 ), type a file name into the File Name field OR browse for an existing file using &lt;Browse&gt;. Note: the File Name must end with the file extension *.txt.   3. Enter desired word or phrase on one line in File Contents. Repeat as often as desired.   4. Select Vocab Output tab, or skip to step 8.   5. Select &lt;Create Vocab Output&gt;.   6. Review Vocab Results to ensure proper results.   7. Click &lt;Save Output&gt;. This will open a Browse window to select a name and location of the output file.   8. Click &lt;Save&gt;.       
 
         [0916]    Editing Input Files 1. Double-click on the desired input file in Input Files 
         [0917]    OR right-click on the desired input file and select Edit from the right-click menu.
       2. Make any changes desired in Input File Builder and click &lt;Save&gt; OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving changes.   3. Select Vocab Output tab, or skip to step 6.   4. Select &lt;Create Vocab Output&gt;.   5. Review Vocab Results to ensure proper results.   6. Click &lt;Save Output&gt;. This will open a Browse window to select a name and location of the output file.       
 
         [0923]    Adding Input Files to Concepts
       1. Open the desired Concept in Concept Editor.   2. Open Patterns.   3. Create a blank input pattern by clicking &lt;Add&gt;.   4. In Input Files, select the desired input file.   5. Drag the desired input file from Input Files to the blank input pattern.   6. Add any desired Vocab Terms, Helper Terms, or Building Blocks.   7. Make any changes to Position, Order, and Proximity.   8. Click Save&gt;       
 
         [0932]    Deleting Input Files
       1. In Input Files, select the desired Input File and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the input file and select Delete in the right-click menu.   2. In the Confirm Delete box, select &lt;OK&gt; to delete the input file from the project OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the box without deleting.       
 
       Advanced Response Items 
       [0935]    This section deals with advanced response items, specifically Dynamic Functions, AppCalls, Conditional Statements and Response Blocks. All of these items are used primarily, though not exclusively, in response-related capacities. 
         [0936]    This section examines the principles behind Conditional Statements, AppCalls, Response Blocks, and Dynamic Functions. 
         [0937]    Conditional Statements 
         [0938]    Conditional statements represent the necessary prerequisites for a specific action being taken. They are used in Response Blocks and often for data-mining operations. In such situations, the conditional statement is a pre-established Variable value. The value of this Variable will then determine the way in which a Unit that contains the given Response Block functions. For instance, a Unit might respond differently based upon whether the user registers as male or female. The user&#39;s gender thus functions as the pre-condition of the Response Block. 
         [0939]    Components Window 
         [0940]    AppCalls are accessed via Components ( FIG. 104 ), along with the previously mentioned Variables and Record Lists. Components contains the following AppCall-related components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;, Add: Creates new 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 AppCall. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;, Edit: Opens AppCall 
               
               
                   
                 Editor with selected AppCall 
               
               
                   
                 open. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;, Delete: Deletes 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 AppCall from project. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;, Show 
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies: Shows all Units 
               
               
                   
                 and Concepts in which the 
               
               
                   
                 selected AppCall appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Components 
               
               
                   
                 display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of current 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Components 
                 Display list of all available components. 
               
               
                 display 
                 AppCalls are listed thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 AppCalls 
               
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades for specific 
               
               
                   
                 text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: Limits search 
               
               
                   
                 to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
               
                 Right-click 
                 This right-click menu contains the 
               
             
          
           
               
                 menu 
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Add: Creates new AppCall. 
               
               
                   
                 → Edit: Opens AppCall Editor for 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 the selected AppCall. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 →Delete: Deletes selected AppCall from project. 
               
               
                   
                 →show Dependencies: Opens 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Show Dependencies window for 
               
               
                   
                 selected AppCall. 
               
               
                   
                 Search Usage: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Usage window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0941]    AppCalls 
         [0942]    AppCalls, short for “Application Calls,” are a form of response wherein an external application is used. For example, a Unit might have an AppCall that opens a new program or fills out a form when triggered. 
         [0943]    The AppCall consists of two parts. The first is the call to the outside application. 
         [0944]    The second part of an AppCall is to define what parameters (ex: the value of a Variable) needs to be passed along with the AppCall. 
         [0945]    AppCall Editor ( FIG. 105 ) contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Descriptio 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Text field that contains the name of 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the AppCall 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Drop-down that gives options for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 type of AppCall. Select Php if 
               
               
                   
                   
                 generating FPML for ActiveAgent, 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the remaining if used for that 
               
               
                   
                   
                 corresponding product. 
               
               
                   
                 Output Type 
                 Drop-down that gives options for the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 type of output for the AppCall. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Standard: For products other 
               
               
                   
                 than ActiveAgent or older 
               
               
                   
                 versions of ActiveAgent. 
               
               
                   
                 Xml: For all current 
               
               
                   
                 ActiveAgent products. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Required Parameters 
                 Parameters are placeholders for data 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that will be passed to an external 
               
               
                   
                   
                 application. This field contains 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected 
               
               
                   
                 required parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes 
               
               
                   
                 selected required 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 Display: List of all 
               
               
                   
                 required parameters in 
               
               
                   
                 AppCall. 
               
               
                   
                 Text input field: Input 
               
               
                   
                 required parameters here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds input to 
               
               
                   
                 Required 
               
               
                   
                 Parameters display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Updates 
               
               
                   
                 input. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 required 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Adds AppCall to Components. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt; 
                 Closes window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0946]    Configure AppCall Window 
         [0947]    The Configure AppCall window ( FIG. 106 ) will appear when a particular AppCall is brought into a Unit and contains the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Parameters 
                 List of all available parameters. 
               
               
                 &lt;Set Parameter Value 
                 Specifies what information is sent with the 
               
               
                 Type&gt; radio 
                 AppCall. Choose from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 selection 
                 &lt;Select From a Variable&gt;: Sets 
               
               
                   
                 parameter as a pre-assigned 
               
               
                   
                 Variable 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Select From a Record List&gt;: Sets 
               
               
                   
                 the parameter to a previously 
               
               
                   
                 assigned Record List. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Type In a Value&gt;: Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter to a manually-typed 
               
               
                   
                 value 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set From Pattern&gt;: In general, this 
               
               
                   
                 option is not used. Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter to one of the following 
               
               
                   
                 from an input pattern: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  wild-card 
               
               
                   
                 lex type 
               
               
                   
                 Input File 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Value 
                 Value for parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Back&gt; 
                 Previous parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Next&gt; 
                 Next parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Finish&gt; 
                 Closes window with changes saved. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving changes. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0948]    Search AppCall Usage 
         [0949]    The Search AppCall Usage window ( FIG. 107 ) is accessible exclusively through the right-click menu on the Components dockable window. This window allows the user to search for all uses of an AppCall and a particular associated parameter. This window has the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Parameters 
                 List of all available parameters. 
               
               
                 &lt;Set Parameter Value 
                 Choose from the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Type&gt; radio 
                 &lt;Select From a Variable&gt;: Sets 
               
               
                 selection 
                 parameter as a pre-assigned 
               
               
                   
                 Variable 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Select From a Record List&gt;: Sets 
               
               
                   
                 the parameter to a previously 
               
               
                   
                 assigned Record List. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Type In a Value&gt;: Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter to a manually-typed 
               
               
                   
                 value 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set From Pattern&gt;: Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter to one of the following 
               
               
                   
                 from an input pattern: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  wild-card 
               
               
                   
                 lex type 
               
               
                   
                 Input File 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Value 
                 Value for parameter. 
               
               
                 &lt;Search&gt; 
                 Searches for all Concepts and Units that 
               
               
                   
                 use the AppCall with selected parameters. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0950]    Response Blocks 
         [0951]    Response Blocks are responses that are shared by multiple Units, which may or may not have other additional response features, such as AppCalls, Dynamic Functions, or Record Lists, which coincide. Response Blocks are also used when more control over the print order of the Unit is desired. They also provide a means of data-mining when combined with dynamic functions. Response Blocks may be added to both Concepts and Units by means of dragging and dropping them into the Response Blocks tab. 
         [0952]    Response Blocks Dockable Window, shown in  FIG. 108 , has the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new Response Block. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens selected Response 
               
               
                   
                 Block for editing. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Response Block. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts and Units in which 
               
               
                   
                 selected Response Block appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes Response 
               
               
                   
                 Blocks display 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigations 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response Blocks 
                 Display of all available Response Blocks 
               
               
                   
                   
                 and their dynamic functions, listed thusly: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response Block 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Call item: Dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 Function 
               
               
                   
                 Call item: Variable 
               
               
                   
                  Call item: Url 
               
               
                   
                 Call item: Clear 
               
               
                   
                 Call item: Copy 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Incomplete Response Block 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades 
               
               
                   
                 for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Right-click menu 
                 This right-click menu contains the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  →Add: Creates new Response 
               
               
                   
                 Block. 
               
               
                   
                  →Edit: Opens selected Response 
               
               
                   
                 Block for editing.. 
               
               
                   
                  →Delete: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Response Block from project. 
               
               
                   
                  →show Dependencies: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Show Dependencies window with 
               
               
                   
                 selected Response Block. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0953]    The Response Block Editor window, shown in  FIG. 109 , includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Name of Response Block. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves Response Block 
               
               
                   
                 to project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Tabs 
                 The following tabs are found in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Response 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Block Editor: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Call Items: Tab that 
               
               
                   
                 provides access to call 
               
               
                   
                 items, such as 
               
               
                   
                 Record Lists and 
               
               
                   
                 dynamic functions. 
               
               
                   
                 Response: plain text response 
               
               
                   
                 or tagged statement. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Conditional 
               
               
                   
                 Statement: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Conditional statements. 
               
               
                   
                 Text To Speech: add a 
               
               
                   
                 particular Text-To-Speech 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0954]    The following discussion describes aspects of the tabs of the Response Block Editor window. 
         [0955]    Call Items are Record Lists, AppCalls, Variables, and dynamic functions that are used when the Response Block is called. Variables, AppCalls, and Record lists are set to the value listed here, similar to the Components tab in the Unit Editor. Call Items contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Row 
                 The button row contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new call item. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  →copy Record List 
               
               
                   
                 Request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected call item. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected call 
               
               
                   
                 item. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Call Items Display 
                 Display of all call items in Response 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Blocks. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0956]    Response allows the user to set a plain text and/or tagged response associated with the Response Block and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves response input. 
               
               
                   
                 Response 
                 Either plain text or FPML response. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0957]    Conditional Statement allows the user to associate specific conditional statements with the Response Block and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 &lt;Add&gt; 
                 Adds a new statement. 
               
               
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves configuration. 
               
               
                 &lt;Delete&gt; 
                 Deletes statement. 
               
               
                 &lt;Choose Type&gt; radio selection 
                 Select one of the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Build Dynamic Statement 
               
               
                   
                 Type Static Statement 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Dynamic Statement 
                 This tab allows the user to construct a 
               
               
                   
                 dynamic statement. It is only 
               
               
                   
                 available if &lt;Build Dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 Statement&gt; is selected. It contains 
               
               
                   
                 the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add New Match 
               
               
                   
                 Condition&gt;: Adds new 
               
               
                   
                 match condition 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Match Conditions 
               
               
                   
                 Edits selected match 
               
               
                   
                 condition 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Match 
               
               
                   
                 Condition&gt;: Deletes 
               
               
                   
                 selected match 
               
               
                   
                 condition. 
               
               
                   
                 Match Condition: Display 
               
               
                   
                 of all match condition 
               
               
                   
                 statements. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Static Statement 
                 This tab allows the user to type a 
               
               
                   
                 static 
               
               
                   
                 statement, and is only available if 
               
               
                   
                 the user selects &lt;Type Static 
               
               
                   
                 Statements 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0958]    Text-To-Speech allows the user to select a specific Text-To-Speech File for the Response Block. Text-To-Speech includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Current File 
                 Name of Text-To-Speech file 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Browse&gt; 
                 Opens Browse window to select a 
               
               
                   
                   
                 particular Text-To-Speech file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove&gt; 
                 Remove selected Text-To-Speech file. 
               
               
                   
                 Status 
                 Displays load information about an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 added Text-To-Speech file. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0959]    Dynamic Functions 
         [0960]    Dynamic functions serve as a means for profiling site users and running searches based upon ranges (such as “cameras between $100 and $200”). They are used in Call Items for Response Blocks. Each dynamic function must reside in its own cascade, which must bear the same name. This cascade must have leveling enabled. Dynamic functions has a dockable window as shown in  FIG. 110  and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 function. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens Dynamic Function 
               
               
                   
                 Editor with selected dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 function loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 function. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Shows all 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts in which the selected 
               
               
                   
                 dynamic function appears. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads Dynamic 
               
               
                   
                 Functions display list. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Dynamic Functions display 
                 Displays a list of all dynamic functions 
               
               
                   
                 available, as well as the Concepts in 
               
               
                   
                 which they appear, and the Record 
               
               
                   
                 Lists ofwhich they are components. 
               
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches cascades 
               
               
                   
                 for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Right-click menu 
                 This right-click menu contains the 
               
               
                   
                 following: 
               
               
                   
                  → Add: Creates new Dynamic 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Function. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Edit: Opens selected Dynamic 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Function for editing.. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Delete: Deletes selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Dynamic Function. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → View File: Opens Dynamic 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Function in Editor. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → show Dependencies: Opens 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Show Dependencies window with 
               
               
                   
                 selected Dynamic Function. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → suggest Concepts: Searches for 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Concepts containing the Record List 
               
               
                   
                 used by the Dynamic Function. If 
               
               
                   
                 the Concept is not used by the 
               
               
                   
                 Dynamic Function, it is suggested. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → show Applications: Shows all 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 applications that use selected 
               
               
                   
                 Dynamic Function. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → 
                 Generate Fpml For 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Function: Generates the FPML 
               
               
                   
                 associated 
               
               
                   
                 with the selected dynamic function. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [0961]    A Dynamic Function Editor, shown in  FIG. 111  is provided and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Name 
                 Text input field for the name of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dynamic Function. 
               
               
                   
                 Type 
                 Dropdown to assign a Cascade Group Type 
               
               
                   
                   
                 to the Dynamic Function will belong. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 There are four options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Dynamic Functions Best Match 
               
               
                   
                 Dynamic Functions Match All 
               
               
                   
                 Dynamic Functions Search and 
               
               
                   
                 Replace 
               
               
                   
                 Dynamic Functions 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Cascade Group 
                 The name of the Cascade Group that the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Dynamic Function will belong. This 
               
               
                   
                   
                 is required to be identical to the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Name. 
               
               
                   
                 Lex File 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Load New Lex&gt; Loads new Lex 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                   
                 Lex file: Drop-down list to select 
               
               
                   
                 lex file. Default is lex file 
               
               
                   
                 associated with the open project. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Pattern Override 
                 Selecting a Pattern Override will change 
               
               
                   
                   
                 the Position of the patterns in the Concepts 
               
               
                   
                   
                 only while the Dynamic Function is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 processed. The following Positions are 
               
               
                   
                   
                 available: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 None 
               
               
                   
                 Beginning 
               
               
                   
                 End 
               
               
                   
                 Entire 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Print Order 
                 Where the Dynamic Function appears in 
               
               
                   
                   
                 load order. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt; 
                 Saves dynamic function. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes window without saving. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Managing Advanced Response Items 
       [0962]    This section deals with managing the AppCalls, Response Blocks, and dynamic functions. AppCalls are found in Components. This sub-section deals with the procedures involved in creating, editing, and using AppCalls. Creating new app calls can be performed using the AppCall Editor shown in  FIG. 112  using the following procedure:
       1. In the Components dockable window, select the AppCalls object.   2. Open the AppCall Editor window.   3. Enter a name for the AppCall in the Name field.   4. Select a Type from the drop-down list.   5. Select an Output Type from the drop-down list.   6. Enter a string of FPML in the Required Parameters field.   7. Click &lt;Add&gt;.   8. Repeat steps 6 &amp; 7 as often as desired.   9. Click &lt;Save&gt;.       
 
         [0972]    To edit AppCalls, perform the following procedure using the AppCall editor of  FIG. 112 :
       1. Double-click on the desired AppCall in Components OR select the desired AppCall and right-click on the desired AppCall and select Edit from the right-click menu.   2. In AppCall Editor, double click on the desired required parameter OR select the desired required parameter and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR right-click the desired required parameter and select Edit from the right-click menu.   3. Make any changes in the Required Parameters field and click &lt;Update&gt; to replace the old required parameter OR click &lt;Add&gt; to add the new form as an additional required parameter.   4. Repeat steps 2 &amp; 3 as often as needed.   5. When finished, click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [0978]    To delete AppCalls, perform the following procedure using the editor of  FIG. 112 :
       1. Select the desired AppCall in Components and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired AppCall and select Delete from the right-click menu.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the AppCall OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.       
 
         [0981]    To create new response blocks, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Response Blocks, right-click in the window and select Add from the right-click menu.   2. In Response Block Editor, enter a Name and click &lt;Save&gt;.   3. In Call Items, add any desired Dynamic Functions,       
 
         [0985]    Record Lists, AppCalls, or Variables by dragging them from their respective dockable window. You may be prompted to set the value the item will have when the Response Block is triggered.
       4. In Response, type in the desired response and click &lt;Save&gt;.   5. In Conditional Statement, click &lt;Add&gt;   6. Select &lt;Build Dynamic Statement&gt; or &lt;Type Static Statement&gt;.
           a. If &lt;Build Dynamic Statement&gt; is selected, use the following procedure:
               1. Choose Concatenator from the drop-down list.   11. Click &lt;Add&gt;.   111. Set Variables for each operand in Match Condition.   
               b. If &lt;Type Static Statement&gt; is selected, use the following procedure:
               i. Type the desired static statement into the Static Statement tab.   
               
           7. In Text-To-Speech, select a particular Text-To-Speech by clicking &lt;Browse&gt; if desired.       
 
         [0996]    To edit response blocks, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Response Blocks, select the desired Response Block and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR right-click on the desired Response Block and select Edit from the right-click menu. Either of these will open Response Block Editor.   2. Make any changes desired in Call Items, Response, Conditional Statement, and Text-To-Speech desired.       
 
         [0999]    To deleting response blocks, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Response Blocks, select the desired Response Block and click &lt;Delete&gt;.   2. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the Response Block OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting the Response Block.       
 
         [1002]    To create new dynamic functions, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Dynamic Functions, click &lt;Add&gt;, opening Dynamic Function Editor.   2. Enter a Name for the new dynamic function. The name entered will be copied into Cascade Group automatically.   3. Select a Type from the drop-down menu.   4. Insure that the proper lex file is loaded.   5. Select a Pattern Override from the drop-down menu.   6. Select a Print Order.   7. Click &lt;Save&gt; to close Dynamic Function Editor and save the dynamic function OR click &lt;Cancel&gt; to close the window without saving.       
 
         [1010]    To edit dynamic functions, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Dynamic Functions, select the desired dynamic function and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double click on the desired dynamic function OR right-click on the desired dynamic function and select Edit from the right-click menu.   2. Make any changes desired in Dynamic Function Editor to the Name, Type, Lex File, Pattern Override, and Print Order.   3. Click &lt;Save&gt; when finished to close the window OR click &lt;cancel&gt; to close the window without saving changes.       
 
         [1014]    To delete dynamic functions, perform the following procedure:
       1. In Dynamic Functions select the desired item and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired dynamic function and select Delete from the right-click menu.   2. In the Confirm Delete dialogue, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the dynamic function or &lt;No&gt; to close the dialogue without deleting.       
 
       Using Advanced Response Items 
       [1017]    Until they are placed in a Concept or Unit, advanced response items are just empty templates that do not actually contain any information, just the form. Like Variables, they must be assigned values in order to function properly. 
         [1018]    To call AppCalls from a Concept or Unit, perform the following procedure:
       1. Double-click on the desired Concept or Unit in the Concepts or Units dockable window, respectively, to open it in the appropriate tab.   2. In the Concept Editor or Unit Editor, select &lt;Advanced View&gt;.   3. Open the Components advanced tab.   4. Drag the desired AppCall from the Components dockable window to the Components tab.   5. In Configure AppCall, select a Parameter Value Type the first parameter.   6. Select a Value.   7. Click &lt;Next&gt;.   8. Repeat steps 5-7 for each parameter.   9. When finished, click &lt;Finish&gt; to close the window.       
 
         [1028]    AppCalls may also be manually input into the response of a Unit in the Response tab. 
         [1029]    To use response blocks in a concept or unit, perform the following procedure:
       1. Open the desired Concept or Unit in its respective tab.   2. Select Advanced View.   3. Open Response Blocks.   4. Drag the desired Response Block from the dockable window to the Concept or Unit.       
 
         [1034]    Response Blocks can also be incorporated into the Concept or Unit by adding it to Wild Cards within any input patterns. 
         [1035]    Dynamic Functions are added to Concepts and Units as part of Response Blocks, which are in turn added to Concepts and Units as described above. To add dynamic functions to a concept or unit, perform the following procedure:
       1. Open the desired Response Block from Response Blocks.   2. Drag the desired Dynamic Function from its dockable window into the Call Items tab of Response Block Editor.   3. Add the Response Block to the Concept or Unit using the procedures described above.       
 
         [1039]    Testing and Debugging 
         [1040]    Testing and its sister function, debugging, are important elements of creating a successful project. To this end, this section will examine both the testing and debugging features of Active Lab. 
         [1041]    Details of Tests 
         [1042]    While tests for each Unit and Concept may be found in the respective tabs, it is also possible to view the tests for the entire project in a Tests Tab shown in  FIG. 113 . This tab displays the results for every single test in the project. 
         [1043]    Unit tests are organized by Situation Group, while Concept tests are organized by Concept Group. Each Concept Group and Situation Group may be expanded to view its constituent parts, and each of these in turn may be expanded to view the individual test questions. 
         [1044]    As with the tests in individual Units and Concepts, green circles represent success, yellow circles represent a test that did not run, and red circles indicate a failed test. If one test for one Unit or Concept shows up red, the status of the Unit or situation itself will show red, and will in turn lead to a red status for the Situation Group or Concept Group in which it appears. This status is also reflected on the project as a whole. Thus, if so much as one test question in one Concept in the entire project shows red, the entire project will be red. Put simply, the status of any group is only as good as that of its worst constituent. 
         [1045]    The Tests Tab contains the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Run Tests&gt;: Runs all tests. Note: 
               
               
                   
                 In order to ensure that the tests are 
               
               
                   
                 up-to-date, always force generate 
               
               
                   
                 all FPMLfirst. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Reload Tests&gt;: Reloads all tests. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds new test to selected 
               
               
                   
                 Concept or Unit in Test Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edits selected test question 
               
               
                   
                 in Test Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Debug Question&gt;: Sends selected 
               
               
                   
                 question to Debugger. where match 
               
               
                   
                 data may be viewed. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set Question Active/Inactive&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Toggles question to active or 
               
               
                   
                 inactive. Default is active. Inactive 
               
               
                   
                 questions will not be tested, and 
               
               
                   
                 therefore will not affect the over-all 
               
               
                   
                 status of the Concept, Unit, or 
               
               
                   
                 group. 
               
               
                   
                 Icon shows when tests may not be 
               
               
                   
                 up to date. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Test Statistics 
                 This display shows the percentage 
               
               
                   
                 passed, along with a ratio of Passed/Non 
               
               
                   
                 Passed of all Units, Unit Tests, Concepts, 
               
               
                   
                 and Concept Tests, respectively. 
               
               
                 Test Selection drop-down list 
                 Selection of tests. Allows user to narrow 
               
               
                   
                 down the tests to be displayed or run. 
               
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Input Text Field: Searches 
               
               
                   
                 cascades for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                  Navigates between 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Right-Click Menu 
                 The right-click menu will change based 
               
               
                   
                 on 
               
               
                   
                 whether a Unit, Concept, or test 
               
               
                   
                 question is selected. In general, it 
               
               
                   
                 contains the following options: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Edit: Opens Test Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 Delete Question: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 Debug Question: Opens 
               
               
                   
                 Debugger tab and loads 
               
               
                   
                 selected question into the 
               
               
                   
                 debugger. 
               
               
                   
                 Set Active/Inactive: Toggles 
               
               
                   
                 status of selected test question 
               
               
                   
                 between Active and InActive. 
               
               
                   
                 Find Duplicates: Searches all 
               
               
                   
                 tests for duplicate of selected 
               
               
                   
                 question. 
               
               
                   
                 Copy: Copies selected test 
               
               
                   
                 question into Windows 
               
               
                   
                 clipboard. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1046]    Test Editor, shown in  FIG. 114 , allows the user to add and edit test questions for a Unit or Concept without opening the respective tab associated with such. Test Editor contains the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Questions 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Display: List of test questions 
               
               
                   
                 within the Concept or Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Text Input Field: Edit and add 
               
               
                   
                 questions here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Adds Questions 
               
               
                   
                 input. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Update&gt;: Saves Questions 
               
               
                   
                 input changes. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove&gt;: Removes 
               
               
                   
                 selected question. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1047]    Details of Debugger 
         [1048]    The Debugger enables you to validate the FPML to make sure it is syntactically correct. Syntax is only one part of creating FPML. The other is ensuring the right response and action is taken for the right input. The Debugger also allows you to see what response will be given for a given input. To further aid in testing and validating FPML, the Debugger allows entire input scripts to be run in order to verify comprehensive response results. 
         [1049]      FIG. 115  illustrates the debugger tab which has the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Chat Control 
                 This window allows the user to interact 
               
               
                 dockable window 
                 with the project. Its components are as 
               
               
                   
                 follows: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Reload Debugger&#39;s FPML&gt;. 
               
               
                   
                 Reloads the FPML into the 
               
               
                   
                 debugger, either the entire project, 
               
               
                   
                 or just those files that have been 
               
               
                   
                 altered. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Set/Clear Show Lex Types as 
               
               
                   
                 Type&gt;. When toggled, shows lex 
               
               
                   
                 types in match data. Default is not 
               
               
                   
                 toggled. 
               
               
                   
                 Chat History display. Displays the 
               
               
                   
                 interaction between user and Agent. 
               
               
                   
                 Chat Here field. Allows the user to 
               
               
                   
                 input questions to the Agent as if it 
               
               
                   
                 were a live person. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Send to Chat&gt; button. 
               
               
                   
                 Sends input from Chat Here 
               
               
                   
                 field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Match Data 
                 This tab displays the Vocab Terms, 
               
               
                   
                 Concepts, and Units hit by the user&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 input in the Chat Here field. This 
               
               
                   
                 following icons are also used: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 User Input: displays next to 
               
               
                   
                 the original user input (also 
               
               
                   
                 known as 
               
               
                   
                 the Pre-processed string). 
               
               
                   
                 Pre-Processed String: 
               
               
                   
                 displays next to a processed 
               
               
                   
                 string that will 
               
               
                   
                 be sent to the next series 
               
               
                   
                 of Cascades (also known 
               
               
                   
                 as a Processed string). 
               
               
                   
                 Hit Concept: Concept that 
               
               
                   
                 has been triggered by the 
               
               
                   
                 input. 
               
               
                   
                 Lower Scoring Concept: 
               
               
                   
                 Concept that was triggered, but 
               
               
                   
                 has been 
               
               
                   
                 eliminated from the Cascade 
               
               
                   
                 because it did not score as high 
               
               
                   
                 as another Concept that it was 
               
               
                   
                 Best Matched with. 
               
               
                   
                 Lower Scoring Unit: Unit that 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 was 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 triggered, but did not score high 
               
               
                   
                 enough to give its response. 
               
               
                   
                 Highest Scoring Unit: Unit that 
               
               
                   
                 scored the highest, and whose 
               
               
                   
                 response is therefore used. 
               
               
                   
                 Score: Displays the score of the 
               
               
                   
                 Concept or Unit that it is above it. 
               
               
                   
                 Pattern: Displays the pattern that 
               
               
                   
                 triggered the Concept or Unit above 
               
               
                   
                 it. 
               
               
                   
                 Static File Hit: Displays what line 
               
               
                   
                 in a Static File that is triggered. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 This tab also has the following buttons: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt;: Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt;: Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Find Tied Scores&gt;: Displays in 
               
               
                   
                 red all scores that tied. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Copy Debug Data To Another 
               
               
                   
                 PopUp&gt;: Opens copy of Match 
               
               
                   
                 Data tab in new window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 App Calls 
                 This tab displays all the App Calls that 
               
               
                   
                 were triggered from the user&#39;s input in 
               
               
                   
                 the Chat Here field, along with their 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding values. 
               
               
                 Brain Variables 
                 This tab shows the brain Variables 
               
               
                   
                 triggered by the user&#39;s input in the Chat 
               
               
                   
                 Here field, along with their 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding value. 
               
               
                 Web Page 
                 This tab displays the web page that was 
               
               
                   
                 triggered from the user&#39;s input in the 
               
               
                   
                 Chat Here field. It also has the 
               
               
                   
                 following displays: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Web Sever Base Uri field: 
               
               
                   
                 domain name or Url used to 
               
               
                   
                 append Urls 
               
               
                   
                 that written with only the 
               
               
                   
                 relative path (or path not 
               
               
                   
                 including a domain). 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: saves Web Server Base 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Url 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 FPML Page Variable: displays 
               
               
                   
                 label of displayed web page. Click 
               
               
                   
                 link to open Uri Editor. 
               
               
                   
                 Current Web Page: displays 
               
               
                   
                 path for displayed web page. 
               
               
                   
                 Click link 
               
               
                   
                 to open web page in new window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 FPML Error Message 
                 This tab displays all FPML errors that 
               
               
                   
                 have recently occurred. It also has one 
               
               
                   
                 button: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Clear Error Message&gt;: Clears the 
               
               
                   
                 FPML Error Message tab. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Load Data 
                 This tab displays the load status of all the 
               
               
                   
                 FPML files in the database to ensure 
               
               
                   
                 that they are available. Errors appear 
               
               
                   
                 in red. 
               
               
                 Raw Match Data 
                 This tab displays the raw FPML code 
               
               
                   
                 that is used to generate the Unit&#39;s 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                 Watch Variables 
                 This dockable window, normally hidden, 
               
               
                   
                 displays a list of chosen Variables, as well 
               
               
                   
                 as their current value. This window also 
               
               
                   
                 has the following right-click menu: 
               
               
                   
                  → Add: Opens a text field to type 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 the name of desired Variable. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Edit: Edit the name of selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Variable 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Delete: Removes selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Variable from Watch Variables 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Clear All: Removes all 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Variables from the Watch Variables 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  → Copy Record Set Xml to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Clipboard: Copies an Xml version 
               
               
                   
                 of selected Record List to Window 
               
               
                   
                 clipboard. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1050]    The Debugger is designed to allow users great flexibility in their testing and debugging processes. After a KB has been thoroughly debugged in Active Lab, it is recommended to also test it in the Active Agent application before using it live. The Debugger environment does not replicate the AppCalls, as they are defined in the application using the FPML. 
         [1051]    Chat Control 
         [1052]    The Chat Control dockable window, usually residing on the left hand side of the Debugger tab, is used to directly ask questions to the Agent. 
         [1053]    Anything entered into the Chat Here window will be processed by Active Lab. The response will be displayed in the Chat History window directly above it. The processes that occur to receive that response are displayed in the variety of tabs that appear in the Debugger. 
         [1054]    Note: Any time that “Send To Debugger” is selected elsewhere in Active Lab, the Debugger tab is opened and the selected test question in entered into the Chat Here field and processed. 
         [1055]    The Match Data Tab 
         [1056]    Match Data, as described above, displays the procedure used by the project to trigger the Unit. More specifically, it shows how the pre-processed string is converted into Vocab and Helper Terms, which Concepts are triggered by the Vocab and Helper Terms, then which Units are then triggered by those Concepts. 
         [1057]    Here is a breakdown of the pieces of the Match Data:
       The User Input entry displays the natural language form of the user&#39;s input, also known as the Pre-processed string.   The first Pre-Processed String entry shows the string after it has been processed through the Vocab cascades, but before it is sent to the Concept cascades.   All Concepts that are triggered by the first Modified String will be displayed as a Concept Hit or as a Lower Scoring Concept. The Score of the Concept listed, as well as what pattern triggered it.   Multiple Pre-Processed String entries will show the string as it is processed through all the Concept cascades, but before it is sent to the Unit cascades. Vocab and Helper Terms are still displayed, and now Concepts are displayed as {cp Concept Name cp}.   The Highest Scoring Unit, along with any other Lower Scoring Units, are the last items displayed at the bottom of the Match Data tab. The score for each Unit that was triggered is displayed, along with which pattern triggered the Unit.   When no Unit is triggered, the processed string is handled by FPML that is hand written in Static Files. The Static File Hit will list which line within the listed static file was hit.       
 
         [1064]    Note: In case of a tie, the Unit that was triggered last will be listed as the Highest Scoring Unit. In case of a tie between Concepts that are in a Best Match cascade, the Concept that was triggered last will be listed as a Concept Hit. 
         [1065]      FIG. 116  shows an example of Match Data. Here you can see how the User Input string “what is your favorite food” is converted into the Vocab and Helper Terms “askwhat your favoritevocab foodvocab”. The Concepts that are triggered are Define, Dining, Favorite, and Favorite Food. Two Units were triggered, Inflight Meals, and Favorite Food. The response that is delivered comes from the Unit that scored the highest, which in this case is Favorite Food. 
         [1066]    The App Calls tab 
         [1067]    The App Calls tab, shown in  FIG. 117 , displays the information on any AppCalls triggered by the Unit or Concept. It is important to note that while the information may be displayed, the Debugger does not actually perform the AppCall operation in question. 
         [1068]    The Brain Variables Tab 
         [1069]    The Brain Variables tab, shown in  FIG. 118 , displays information on the processes occurring within the program&#39;s Context IQ Engine, or “brain”, as well as the current value of all Variables after a question has been asked in the Debugger. 
         [1070]    Right-click on any Variable and select Add Watch to add selected Variable to the Watch Variables window. 
         [1071]    The Web Page Tab 
         [1072]    The Web Page tab, shown in  FIG. 119 , displays which web page was triggered by the Unit Response, along with the Urllabel and a link to that page. 
         [1073]    The Fpml Error Messages Tab 
         [1074]    The Fpml Error Messages tab, shown in  FIG. 120 , shows errors that have occurred in the FPML, along with when they occurred. This screen can be cleared by clicking on the &lt;Clear Error Message&gt; Button. 
         [1075]    The Load Data Tab 
         [1076]    The Load Data tab, shown in  FIG. 121 , displays the loading process of all the FPML involved in the Unit. Files that did not load properly are displayed in a prominent color, such as red. 
         [1077]    Each entry in the Load Data tab displays consists of an action and a file path. Common actions include: Loading, Learning, and IRDLL. Each *.FPML file that is loaded correctly will be listed in black, and errors will be listed in red. 
         [1078]    The Raw Match Data Tab 
         [1079]    The Raw Match Data tab, shown in  FIG. 122 , shows exactly how the Pre-processed string is handled all the way to the output that is displayed back to the user. This tab shows the actual FPML code as it processes the input string through each cascade and static file. 
         [1080]    Watch Variables Dockable Window 
         [1081]    The Watch Variables window, shown in  FIG. 123 , is used, literally, to watch the value of any number of selected Variables. Any time the value of a Variable changes, that change will immediately be seen in this window. 
         [1082]    Variables can be easily added or removed from Watch Variables, using the available right-click menu. 
         [1083]    Viewing Dependencies 
         [1084]    One of the most powerful tools to track down problems is the Dependencies window shown in  FIG. 124 . A Dependency is a list of all items in the project that use the selected item. For example, if &lt;Show Dependencies&gt; was selected from a Concept, all Units and Building Blocks that used that Concept would be displayed in the Dependencies window. If &lt;Show Dependencies&gt; was selected from a Vocab, all Concepts and Building Blocks that used that Vocab would be displayed. 
         [1085]    The Dependency window can be opened by selecting a particular item and choosing &lt;Show Dependencies&gt; from many of the Button Bars. It is also available on many different right-click menus. 
         [1086]    Displayed in  FIG. 124  is the Dependencies window. In this image, the dependencies for the Concept “Benefits” has been found. The Units that use the Concept “Benefits” are listed here, as well as the patterns within those Units that use the Concept. 
         [1087]    The Dependencies window has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Replace Usage checkbox 
                 Check to view Drag/Drop Replacement 
               
               
                   
                 field and view a check box next to each 
               
               
                   
                 item in Dependencies. 
               
               
                 Drag/Drop Replacement field 
                 Drag and Drop one item that will replace 
               
               
                   
                 all checked items in the Dependencies 
               
               
                   
                 Display 
               
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Opens selected items 
               
               
                   
                 Editor window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete Item And Ignore All 
               
               
                   
                 Dependencies&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 regardless if it has dependencies. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Refreshes display and 
               
               
                   
                 collapses entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Show 
               
               
                   
                 dependencies of selected item. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Create Tests From 
               
               
                   
                 Units/Concepts&gt;: Opens Tests 
               
               
                   
                 tab with only tests that are used 
               
               
                   
                 for the Units and Concepts 
               
               
                   
                 currently in the Dependencies 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Main Tree&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Highlights selected item in its 
               
               
                   
                 corresponding dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Replace&gt;: Replaces the 
               
               
                   
                 searched item with the item in the 
               
               
                   
                 Drag/Drop Replacement field if 
               
               
                   
                 selected line is checked. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Dependencies Display 
                 Displays all dependencies for searched 
               
               
                   
                 item in a tree format, including 
               
               
                   
                 all patterns that use the searched 
               
               
                   
                 item. 
               
               
                   
                 Check boxes will only appear if 
               
               
                   
                 Replace Usage checkbox is selected. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1088]    Testing Conditions 
         [1089]    The Test Conditions dockable window, shown in  FIG. 125 , is used to artificially assign the value of Variables of Record Lists for the purposes of testing. 
         [1090]    There are two Test Conditions that can be set to Variables and Record Lists: Pre-Conditions and Post-Conditions. These conditions are then assigned to any number of test questions. 
         [1091]    When a Pre-Condition and inserted into a test question, the value of the condition is set just prior to the test question being run. When a Post-Condition is set into a test question, the value of the condition is set just after the test question is run. 
         [1092]    Test Conditions contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens Create new Pre/Post 
               
               
                   
                 Condition window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Open Edit window to edit 
               
               
                   
                 test conditions. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected test 
               
               
                   
                 condition. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: Currently 
               
               
                   
                 has no effect. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy of 
               
               
                   
                 current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads Test 
               
               
                   
                 Conditions Display. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses entire 
               
               
                   
                 tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Test Conditions Display 
                 The Display shows the different test 
               
               
                   
                 condition in tree format: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Pre-Condition 
               
               
                   
                 Post Condition 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1093]    Create/Edit New Pre/Post-Condition 
         [1094]    Creating and editing pre and post conditions is completed using three different windows, an example of which is shown in  FIG. 126 , all with identical functionality:
       Create New Pre-Condition   Create New Post-Condition   Edit       
 
         [1098]    Edit contains the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Name 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Text Field: Location of the 
               
               
                   
                 name of the condition 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves the name of 
               
               
                   
                 the condition. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Values 
                 Values has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
               
                   
                 Variable or Record List from 
               
               
                   
                 condition. 
               
               
                   
                 Values Display: Shows values 
               
               
                   
                 set for all Variables and Record 
               
               
                   
                 Lists for the condition. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Set Value To Display 
                 This Display will show differently if a 
               
               
                   
                 Variable or Record List has been selected 
               
               
                   
                 in Values. If a Variable has been selected, 
               
               
                   
                 the display has the following components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: Value of the Variable 
               
               
                   
                 or Record list is set here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Save value of Variable 
               
               
                   
                 or Record List 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt;: Do not save value of 
               
               
                   
                 Variable or Record List. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt;: Closes the window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 If a Record list has been selected, the 
               
               
                   
                 display has the following components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Index Value: Determines Load 
               
               
                   
                 Order of the Test Condition. 
               
               
                   
                 Parameter: Lists name of the 
               
               
                   
                 parameter being edited. 
               
               
                   
                 Radio Buttons 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Set Text Value: Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 value of the Variable to 
               
               
                   
                 the value listed in the Text 
               
               
                   
                 Field below. 
               
               
                   
                 Set Variable: Sets the 
               
               
                   
                 value of the Variable to 
               
               
                   
                 one selected from the 
               
               
                   
                 dropdown below. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves the value of the 
               
               
                   
                 Record List parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt;: Does not save the 
               
               
                   
                 value of the Record List 
               
               
                   
                 parameter. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Close&gt;: Closes the window. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Managing Tests and Debugger 
       [1099]    This section deals with the procedures involved in testing and debugging. 
         [1100]    Managing Tests 
         [1101]    This sub-section deals with adding new test questions, editing existing test questions, and running tests. 
         [1102]    Adding New Test Questions 
         [1103]    In addition, new test questions may be added in Tests. To add a new test question, use the following procedure in connection with the window shown in  FIG. 127 :
       1. In Tests, select the desired Unit or Concept to which the new question will be added.   2. Click &lt;Add&gt; to open Test Editor.   3. In Test Editor, type the desired test question in Question.   4. Click &lt;Add&gt;   5. Repeat steps 3 &amp; 4 as often as desired.   6. When finished, click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [1110]    Editing Test Questions 
         [1111]    Test questions may be edited in Test Editor or in Concept Editor or Unit Editor, respectively. The following is the procedure for editing a test found in Tests in its appropriate tab:
       1. Double click on the desired test question. The appropriate Unit Editor or Concept Editor tab will open.   2. Follow the procedures for editing a test questions as described in Concepts—Adding Questions or Units—   3. Adding Questions.       
 
         [1115]    To edit test questions in Test Editor, use the following procedure:
       1. In Tests, select the desired test question and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired test question. This will open Test Editor with the test questions for the selected Unit or Concept loaded.   2. Make any changes desired to the selected test question and click &lt;Update&gt;.   3. When finished, click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [1119]    Deleting Test Questions 
         [1120]    To delete a test question in Tests, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired test question and click &lt;Delete&gt; OR right-click on the desired test question and select Delete from the right-click menu.   2. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the test question OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting.       
 
         [1123]    To delete a test question in Test Editor, use the following procedure:
       1. Select the desired test question in Tests and click &lt;Edit&gt; OR double-click on the desired test question; either of these methods will open the test question in Test Editor.   2. Ensure that the test question is selected and click &lt;Remove&gt;.   3. In Confirm Delete, click &lt;Yes&gt; to delete the test question OR click &lt;No&gt; to close the window without deleting the test question.       
 
         [1127]    Running Tests 
         [1128]    To run tests in Tests, use the following procedure:
       1. Ensure that all FPML is up-to-date by selecting &lt;Generate FPML (Changes Only)&gt; OR &lt;Generate All FPML&gt;. Select the tests to be run from Test Selection.   2. Click &lt;Run Tests&gt;. This may take a while   3. Examine the results.       
 
         [1132]    Debugging Questions 
         [1133]    After examining the test results, it is important to examine the causes of any failures that might have cropped up. To debug a question (particularly a failed question), use the following procedure:
       1. In Tests, select the desired test question and click &lt;Debug Test Question&gt; OR right-click on the desired test question and select Debug Question from the right-click menu.   2. In Debugger, examine results.       
 
         [1136]    Debugging 
         [1137]    This sub-section deals specifically with the procedures involved in debugging Units and Concepts. 
         [1138]    Manual Debugging Procedures 
         [1139]    Manual debugging is useful for running scripts through the FPML. To manually debug a project, use the following procedure:
       1. In Debugger, type an input into Chat Here.   2. View the response in Chat History.   3. Examine results in Match Data, App Calls, Brain Variables, Web Page, FPML Error Messages, LoadData, and Raw Match Data.       
 
         [1143]    Debugging from Outside the Debugger 
         [1144]    To debug any question automatically from outside the Debugger, simply right-click on the test question and select Debug Question. This will have the same effect as typing the question into the Debugger directly. 
         [1145]    Dependencies 
         [1146]    This sub-section shows the different uses of the Dependencies window. 
         [1147]    Find Dependency 
         [1148]    There are two ways to find the dependencies on an item:
       Right-click on selected item and choose show Dependencies.   Highlight the selected item and choose &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;       
 
         [1151]    Replace Usage 
         [1152]    To replace either one item or a large group of a selected item with another, follow this procedure.
       1. Select item to be replaced by right clicking and choosing show Dependencies OR by choosing &lt;Show Dependencies&gt; from the Button Bar. This will open the Dependencies window.   2. Check Replace Usage checkbox in Dependencies.   3. Drag replacement item into Drag/Drop Replacement field.   4. Check all boxes in Dependencies Display that have the searched for item that will be replaced. Note: Checking an item higher in the tree will check all items that are included in that branch.   5. Click &lt;Replace&gt;. The searched item will be replaced with the replacement item.       
 
         [1158]    Test Conditions 
         [1159]    This sub-section will describe the creation, editing, and use of Test Conditions. 
         [1160]    Creating Test Conditions 
         [1161]    The steps for creating both Pre and Post Condition are the same:
       1. Open the Test Conditions dockable window.   2. Highlight either Pre-Conditions or Post-Conditions, depending on which will be created.   3. Select &lt;Add&gt; OR right-click→Add. Create New Pre/Post Condition will open.   4. Type desired Name and press &lt;Enter&gt; or &lt;Save&gt;. The name of the window will change to Edit followed by the name of the Test Condition.   5. Drag desired Variable or Record List into Values Display from Components dockable window. The Set Value To Display will activate. Repeat for all Variables and Record Lists desired for selected   6. Click &lt;Expand&gt; to view Variables and/or Record Lists.   7. Highlight the first Variable or Record List item.   8. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   9. Change Set Value Display to the desired value of the Variable or Record List. Repeat steps 5-8 for each Variable and Record List.   10. Click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [1172]    Editing Test Conditions 
         [1173]    The steps for creating both Pre and Post Condition are the same:
       1. Open the Test Conditions dockable window.   2. Double click on chosen Pre/Post Condition OR highlight chosen Pre/Post Condition and click &lt;Edit&gt;.   3. Edit Name field and press &lt;Enter&gt; or click &lt;Save&gt;.   4. Click &lt;Expand&gt; to view Variables or Record Lists used by the test condition.   5. Left-click once to bring up a Variable or Record List parameter in the Set Value To display.   6. Edit Set Value To display as desired. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as many times as needed.   7. Click &lt;Save&gt;.   8. Click &lt;Close&gt;.       
 
         [1182]    Deleting Test Conditions 
         [1183]    The steps for deleting both Pre and Post Condition are the same:
       1. Open the Test Conditions dockable window.   2. Click on chosen Pre/Post Condition and click &lt;Delete OR highlight chosen Pre/Post Condition and right-click→Delete.       
 
         [1186]    Adding a Test Condition to a Test Question 
         [1187]    Once a Test Condition has been created, it can be linked with any number of test questions:
       1. Open the Tests tab in either the Concept Editor or the Unit Editor.   2. Open the Test Conditions dockable window.   3. Drag selected Test Condition from the Test Conditions dockable window to the desired test question in the Tests tab. A window will pop up prompting whether to add the Test Condition to all tests for the Unit/Concept.   4. Select &lt;Yes&gt; or &lt;No&gt; in the pop-up.       
 
         [1192]    Removing a Test Condition from a Test Question 
         [1193]    To remove a Test Condition from a test question, follow this procedure:
       1. Open the Tests tab in either the Concept Editor or the Unit Editor   2. Highlight the name of the test condition and click &lt;Delete&gt; or right-click on the name of the test condition and select→Delete.       
 
       Static Files and Editor 
       [1196]    The Editor tab allows the user to view and interact with the raw FPML code of static files and lex files that forms the basis of all of Active Lab&#39;s operations. 
         [1197]    The Editor tab, shown in  FIG. 128 , has the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Button Bar 
                 The button bar contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;New&gt;: Starts a new *.fpml file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Open&gt;: Opens an existing 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves the currently open 
               
               
                   
                 *.fpml file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cut&gt;: Removes selected text 
               
               
                   
                 from the currently open *.fpml 
               
               
                   
                 file. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Copy&gt;: Copies selected text 
               
               
                   
                 from the currently open *.fpml 
               
               
                   
                 file to the clipboard. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Paste&gt;: Inserts copied text from 
               
               
                   
                 the clipboard into the currently 
               
               
                   
                 open *.fpml file at a selected 
               
               
                   
                 location. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Allows the user to 
               
               
                   
                 search the currently open *.fpml 
               
               
                   
                 file for text. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Editor 
                 Text field displays the text of an 
               
               
                   
                   
                 *.fpml file, and allows the user to 
               
               
                   
                   
                 edit it as desired. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
       Using Editor 
       [1198]    The Editor can be used in the same manner as other text editors. There are also customizable shortcuts which can be configured in the shortcuts.xml file located in the directory with Active Lab. 
       Static Files 
       [1199]    Static Files are FPML files created manually using either a standard text editor or Active Lab&#39;s Editor tab. They allow the user to create custom 
         [1200]    FPML functions beyond Active Lab&#39;s capabilities should such a need arise. Static files must be created manually outside of the lab and then imported into the database using the Static Files dockable window. 
       Lex Files 
       [1201]    Lex Files are instrumental to the proper function of a project, and as such should generally be left alone by the user. The user may view and edit Lex files through the Editor tab, though this is not generally recommended for most users. 
       Change Request 
       [1202]    While change requests do not directly affect the functioning of a project, they represent a way for the user to view feedback from other users regarding the construction of the project. In this regard, they can be quite useful in the process of fine-tuning the components of a project. 
         [1203]    Because all of these change requests pertain to Units, they may be accessed through their respective Units or through Change Requests. This dockable window contains the components illustrated in  FIG. 129  and described in the table below. 
         [1204]    Change request management occurs primarily within the dockable window of the same name. The right-click menu allows the user to go directly to the Unit in question and make any changes. Change requests may not be deleted, as they serve as a record of the changes made to the project. 
         [1205]    There are six types of change requests:
       Create New Unit Requests   Change Response Request   Url Change Request   Add Test Question Request   Wrong Response   WrongUL       
 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
               
             
          
           
               
                 Button bar 
                 The button bar contains the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Add new Request Group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit&gt;: Edit Request Group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Delete&gt;: Deletes selected 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Request 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Group. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Dependencies&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Currently has no effect. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;New Window&gt;: Opens copy 
               
               
                   
                 of current window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Refresh&gt;: Reloads Change 
               
               
                   
                 Request display list. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Collapse All&gt; Collapses 
               
               
                   
                 entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Expand All&gt; Expands entire tree. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Back and Forward Navigation&gt;: 
               
               
                   
                 Navigates between searches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Filters 
                 Select the filters used to find current 
               
               
                   
                 change requests. This field contains 
               
               
                   
                 the following dropdowns: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Content Management System: 
               
               
                   
                 Select appropriate Content 
               
               
                   
                 Management System 
               
               
                   
                 Change Request Groups: Select 
               
               
                   
                 from available groups. 
               
               
                   
                 Status: Select status of change 
               
               
                   
                 requests to view: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  All 
               
               
                   
                 Pending 
               
               
                   
                  Assigned 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Group By: Select how the display 
               
               
                   
                 will organize the change requests: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 (none): No organization. 
               
               
                   
                 Group By User 
               
               
                   
                 Group By Unit 
               
               
                   
                 Group By Situation 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Change Requests display 
                 Displays change requests in tree view, 
               
               
                   
                 organized by type: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Create New Unit Requests 
               
               
                   
                 Change Response Request 
               
               
                   
                 Url Change Request 
               
               
                   
                 Add Test Question Request 
               
               
                   
                 Wrong Response 
               
               
                   
                 WrongURL 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Search Tree 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Input Text Field: Searches cascades 
               
               
                   
                 for specific text. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search&gt;: Executes search. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Search Options&gt;: Opens Search 
               
               
                   
                 Options window. 
               
               
                   
                 Whole Word Only Checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 Limits search to complete word 
               
               
                   
                 matches. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Right-Click Menu 
                 The following right-click menu only 
               
               
                   
                 applies to the change request item: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 → View Details: Opens 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 corresponding request 
               
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 → Accept Change: Accept 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 change request. Item will now 
               
               
                   
                 appear as regular item in Active 
               
               
                   
                 Lab 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1212]    Create New Unit Request 
         [1213]    New Unit request can be edited, changed, and implemented in the Create New Unit Requests window. This window is broken up into two tabs: the Create Unit Request tab, which shows all the parameters for the Unit; and the Request Information tab, which shows history, comments, and the option to ignore the request. 
         [1214]      FIG. 130  illustrates the Change Unit Request tab which includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Situation 
                 Dropdown that chooses the Situation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Group for the new Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Label 
                 Text Field that displays the name of the 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Unit. 
               
               
                   
                 Response 
                 Text field where the Unit&#39;s response is 
               
               
                   
                   
                 written. 
               
               
                   
                 Url 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  &lt;Edit Url&gt;: Opens Uri Editor with 
               
               
                   
                 current Urlloaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;: Removes 
               
               
                   
                 Url from response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Tree&gt;: Shows current Url 
               
               
                   
                 in Uri dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens two new fields for 
               
               
                   
                 the purpose of creating a new Url: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uri: New Url name field. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: New Url Label field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves new Url. Only 
               
               
                   
                 available through &lt;Add&gt; button. 
               
               
                   
                 Uri: displays path for response. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: displays label ofUrl for 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 Auto Navigate To URL checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, the Unit&#39;s triggered 
               
               
                   
                 response automatically redirects to 
               
               
                   
                 the selected URL. 
               
               
                   
                 Drop-down list: list of all available 
               
               
                   
                 URLs for the response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Questions 
                 Text field where test questions are listed. 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Note: Only use one test question per line. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Create Unit&gt; 
                 Creates the Unit in appropriate Situation 
               
               
                   
                   
                 Group. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1215]    The Request Information tab is shown in  FIG. 131  and includes the following components: 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Request Group dropdown 
                 Choose from available pre-set group that 
               
               
                   
                 created the request. 
               
               
                 Request Information 
                 Field displays all information relating to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  the Unit, including: 
               
               
                   
                 Request Information Display, 
               
               
                   
                 which includes: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response 
               
               
                   
                  URI 
               
               
                   
                 Questions 
               
               
                   
                 Requesting User 
               
               
                   
                 Request Date 
               
               
                   
                 Brain UID 
               
               
                   
                  User Input 
               
               
                   
                 Current Status 
               
               
                   
                 Recommend Status 
               
               
                   
                  Unit ID 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Unit&gt;: Highlights Unit in 
               
               
                   
                 Units dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show History&gt;: Shows Request 
               
               
                   
                  History for the change 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Comments 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New comments 
               
               
                   
                 are typed here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: Saves 
               
               
                   
                 new comments. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Mark As Complete&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as completed 
               
               
                   
                 outside of the change request. 
               
               
                 &lt;Recommend Ignore&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as ignored. 
               
               
                 &lt;Notify Unit Deleted&gt; 
                 Notifies Content Management System that 
               
               
                   
                 the Unit is deleted. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the window making no changes. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1216]    The Response Change Request window, illustrated in  FIG. 132 , is used to edit, implement, or ignore requests to change the response of a Unit and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Requested Response 
                 This field contains two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New response is 
               
               
                   
                 listed here. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Change Unit Response&gt;: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Changes 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 the response of the Unit to the one 
               
               
                   
                 listed in the above text field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Request Group dropdown 
                 Choose from available pre-set group that 
               
               
                   
                 created the request. 
               
               
                 Request Information 
                 Field displays all information relating to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 the Unit, including: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Request Information Display, 
               
               
                   
                 which includes: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Unit Label 
               
               
                   
                 Requested Response 
               
               
                   
                 Old Response 
               
               
                   
                 Old URI 
               
               
                   
                 Old Unit Label 
               
               
                   
                 Is Approval Required 
               
               
                   
                 Requesting User 
               
               
                   
                 Request Date 
               
               
                   
                 Brain UID 
               
               
                   
                  User Input 
               
               
                   
                 Current Status 
               
               
                   
                 Recommend Status 
               
               
                   
                  Unit ID 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Unit&gt;: Highlights Unit 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  in 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Units dockable 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 window. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show History&gt;: Shows 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Request 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 History for the change 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Comments 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New comments 
               
               
                   
                 are typed here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: Saves 
               
               
                   
                 new comments. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Mark As Complete&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as completed 
               
               
                   
                 outside of the change request. 
               
               
                 &lt;Recommend Ignore&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as ignored. 
               
               
                 &lt;Notify Unit Deleted&gt; 
                 Notifies Content Management System 
               
               
                   
                 that the Unit is deleted. 
               
               
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the window making no changes. 
               
               
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1217]    Url Change Request 
         [1218]    The Url Change Request window, illustrated in  FIG. 133 , is used to edit and accept Url change requests and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
           
               
                   
               
               
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
               
             
             
               
                 Requested Url 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Edit Url&gt;: Opens Url Editor with 
               
               
                   
                 current Url loaded. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Remove All Url Items&gt;: Removes 
               
               
                   
                 Url from response. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Show In Tree&gt;: Shows current Url 
               
               
                   
                 in Url dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add&gt;: Opens two new fields for 
               
               
                   
                 the purpose of creating a new Url: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uri: New Url name field. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: New Url Label field 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Save&gt;: Saves new Url. Only available 
               
               
                   
                 through &lt;Add&gt; button. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Uri: displays path for response. 
               
               
                   
                 Label: displays label ofUrl for 
               
               
                   
                 response. 
               
               
                   
                 Auto Navigate To URL checkbox: 
               
               
                   
                 When selected, the Unit&#39;s triggered 
               
               
                   
                 response automatically redirects to 
               
               
                   
                 the selected URL. 
               
               
                   
                 Drop-down list: list of all available 
               
               
                   
                 URLs for the response. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 &lt;Accept Requested Url 
                 Changes the Url to the one listed in the 
               
               
                   
                 Request Url field. 
               
               
                 Current Uri/No Current 
                 Field visible only ifUrl exists for the 
               
               
                 URL Exists 
                 Unit. Contains identical options as 
               
               
                   
                 Requested Url field. 
               
               
                 Request Group dropdown 
                 Choose from available pre-set group that 
               
               
                   
                 created the request. 
               
               
                 Request Information 
                 Field displays all information relating to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  the Unit, including: 
               
               
                   
                 Request Information Display, 
               
               
                   
                 which includes: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Unit Label 
               
               
                   
                 Requested Uri 
               
               
                   
                 Old Response 
               
               
                   
                 Old URI 
               
               
                   
                 Old Unit Label 
               
               
                   
                 Is Approval Required 
               
               
                   
                 Requesting User 
               
               
                   
                 Request Date 
               
               
                   
                 Brain UID 
               
               
                   
                  User Input 
               
               
                   
                 Current Status 
               
               
                   
                 Recommend Status 
               
               
                   
                  Unit ID 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Unit&gt;: Highlights Unit 
               
               
                   
                 in Units dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show History&gt;: Shows 
               
               
                   
                 Request History for the change 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                 Comments 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New comments 
               
               
                   
                 are typed here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: Saves 
               
               
                   
                 new comments. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1219]    Add Question To Unit Request 
         [1220]    The Add Question To Unit Request window, illustrated in  FIG. 134 , is used to edit and accept test questions that will be added to the corresponding Unit and includes the following components. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Add Question 
                 This field contains the following: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: Test question is listed 
               
               
                   
                 here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Add Question&gt;: Adds question in 
               
               
                   
                 Add Question field to the Unit 
               
               
                   
                 listed in the Request Information 
               
               
                   
                 field. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Request Information 
                 Field displays all information relating to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  the 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Unit, including: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Request Information Display, 
               
               
                   
                 which includes: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response 
               
               
                   
                  URI 
               
               
                   
                 Questions 
               
               
                   
                 Requesting User 
               
               
                   
                 Request Date 
               
               
                   
                 Brain UID 
               
               
                   
                  User Input 
               
               
                   
                 Current Status 
               
               
                   
                 Recommend Status 
               
               
                   
                  Unit ID 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Unit&gt;: Highlights Unit in 
               
               
                   
                 Units dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                 History for the change request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Comments 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New comments 
               
               
                   
                 are typed here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: Saves 
               
               
                   
                 new comments. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Mark As Complete&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as completed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 outside of the change request. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Recommend Ignore&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as ignored. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Notify Unit Deleted&gt; 
                 Notifies Content Management System 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that the Unit is deleted. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the window making no changes. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1221]    Wrong Response/Wrong Url 
         [1222]    The Request Details window, illustrated in  FIG. 135 , is used to view Wrong Responses and Wrong Url change requests and includes the following components. This window does not have the functionality to change Units, however it can mark whether a response has been changed. 
         [0000]    
       
         
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
               
               
             
               
               
               
             
           
               
                   
                   
               
               
                   
                 Component 
                 Description 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
             
               
                   
                 Request Information 
                 Field displays all information relating to 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  the Unit, including: 
               
               
                   
                 Request Information Display, 
               
               
                   
                 which includes: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Response 
               
               
                   
                  URI 
               
               
                   
                 Questions 
               
               
                   
                 Requesting User 
               
               
                   
                 Request Date 
               
               
                   
                 Brain UID 
               
               
                   
                  User Input 
               
               
                   
                 Current Status 
               
               
                   
                 Recommend Status 
               
               
                   
                  Unit ID 
               
               
                   
                 Comments 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Show Unit&gt;: Highlights Unit 
               
               
                   
                 in Units dockable window. 
               
               
                   
                  &lt;Show History&gt;: Shows 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  Request History for the change 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                  request. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Comments 
                 This field has two components: 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 Text Field: New comments are 
               
               
                   
                 typed here. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Save Comments&gt;: Saves 
               
               
                   
                 new comments. 
               
             
          
           
               
                   
                 &lt;Mark As Complete&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as completed 
               
               
                   
                   
                 outside of the change request. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Recommend Ignore&gt; 
                 Marks the change request as ignored. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Notify Unit Deleted&gt; 
                 Notifies Content Management System 
               
               
                   
                   
                 that the Unit is deleted. 
               
               
                   
                 &lt;Cancel&gt; 
                 Closes the window making no changes. 
               
               
                   
                   
               
             
          
         
       
     
         [1223]    Example System 
         [1224]      FIG. 136  illustrates an example system in accordance with one or more embodiments. Here, the system includes a computing device  1360  that can be any suitable computing device such as a desktop device, laptop, handheld computing device and the like. In this example, computing device  1360  includes one or more processors  1362  and one or more computer-readable storage media  1364 . Media  1364  can comprise any suitable storage media such as ROM, RAM, a hard disk, flash memory, optical media, magnetic media and the like. 
         [1225]    In one or more embodiments, computer-readable instructions reside on the computer-readable media and implement the functionality described above. Such functionality can reside in the form of an application referred to as Active Lab  1366 . Active Lab  1366  can present the various user interfaces described above and can implement the described functionality. 
       CONCLUSION 
       [1226]    Various embodiments provide a tool, referred to herein as “Active Lab” that can be used to develop, debug, and maintain knowledge bases. These knowledge bases (KBs) can then engage various applications, technology, and communications protocols for the purpose of task automation, real time alerting, system integration, knowledge acquisition, and various forms of peer influence. 
         [1227]    In at least some embodiments, a KB is used as a virtual assistant that any real person can interact with using their own natural language. The KB can then respond and react however the user wants: answering questions, activating applications, or responding to actions on a web page. 
         [1228]    Although the subject matter has been described in language specific to structural features and/or methodological acts, it is to be understood that the subject matter defined in the appended claims is not necessarily limited to the specific features or acts described above. Rather, the specific features and acts described above are disclosed as example forms of implementing the claims.